The industry agreement on reducing food waste was signed between the authorities and a unified food industry in June 2017. The goal of the agreement is to halve food waste in Norway by 2030, in line with the UN’s Sustainable Development Goals. A government-appointed Food Waste Committee delivered a report on January 3, 2024, with recommendations for new and enhanced measures to achieve the halving target. One of the recommended measures is standardized and increased data sharing in the value chain. STAND has developed this standard on behalf of the Food Waste Committee.
The standard defines the format and exchange frequency for purchase forecasts from wholesalers to suppliers in the grocery industry. The purpose of the standard is to contribute to a significant reduction in food waste, as well as to improve the efficiency of goods and information flow in the industry. Furthermore, the standard aims for continuous improvement. This will be achieved through the exchange of defined KPIs and structured bilateral dialogue. To achieve these goals, it is also assumed that suppliers are capable of sending high-quality order confirmations to wholesalers. This means order confirmation down to the product line level and that the stated volume/quantity of products can be delivered at the desired delivery time. Regarding the exchange of other types of information between wholesalers and suppliers, such as the wholesaler’s sales to stores, POS data in stores, and inventory levels, this can be exchanged. This type of exchange is agreed upon and implemented bilaterally.
The purchase forecasts sent by the wholesaler to the supplier include:
a) Normal Sales: New products, phase-outs, and assortment changes should be included in the purchase forecast for normal sales. For new products, a clear distinction must be made between forecasts and orders.
b) Campaign Forecasts: Purchase forecasts for campaigns are included in the figures from wholesaler to supplier along with purchase forecasts for normal sales. To inform about purchase forecasts for campaigns, such as volume, it is recommended to exchange additional information between wholesaler and supplier. Note the handling of pre-orders. A pre-order means a physical order from the wholesaler to the supplier. The wholesaler has already sent the order. This should not be part of the purchase forecast.
c) Seasonal Products: Seasonal products are defined in STAND as “a product sold in a time-limited period related to a season defined by the parties involved.” A distinction is made here between seasonal products and contract sales. Seasonal products are characterized by being ordered from the wholesaler and delivered by the supplier continuously throughout the season. Seasonal products are included in the normal purchase forecast from wholesaler to supplier. Contract sales are characterized by an agreement being made for each product between the wholesaler and the supplier. For contract sales, a volume of the product to be delivered by the supplier to the wholesaler is locked in. Suppliers do not need purchase forecasts for contract sales. However, since no order has been sent from the wholesaler to the supplier, the contract sale for this product will appear as part of the purchase forecast sent by the wholesaler to the supplier. The supplier will then disregard the purchase forecast for these products
The exchange frequency for purchase forecasts is weekly. More frequent exchanges can be agreed upon bilaterally for U-1, U-2, and U-3.
Purchase forecasts from wholesaler to supplier are sent in Excel file format from wholesaler to supplier. The files are sent via email. There is no need for explicit identification of wholesaler and supplier in these emails. The emails are sent from/to email addresses that have been agreed upon in advance.
Two different files should be exchanged:
a. File A contains purchase forecasts per week for weeks 1 – 13. Column headers are EPD number, product description, number of units for the week number (year + calendar week).
b. File B contains purchase forecasts per day for the next three weeks (U–1, U–2, and U–3). Column headers are EPD number, product description, number of units per day that the wholesaler retrieves from the supplier.
The content in the Excel sheets is specified as follows:
EPD number (File A and File B) identifies the ordering unit (D-pack) from wholesaler to supplier. See https://tradesolution.no/tjenester/epd/. Here, the EPD number is defined with 8 digits. Product name/description: It is recommended to use the same description as registered in the EPD database. Length is up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Number of units per week: This refers to the number of ordering units (D-pack), unless otherwise agreed between the parties. Here, the number of units of the EPD number in the purchase forecast for weeks 1 – 13 is recorded. The week number is indicated with “year-week number” in the format “yyyy-ww” from week 1 to 13. There are 13 columns allocated.
Number of units per day: This refers to the number of ordering units (D-pack), unless otherwise agreed between the parties. Here, the number of units of the EPD number in the daily purchase forecast that the wholesaler retrieves from the supplier for the next three weeks U-1, U-2, U-3 is recorded. The day is indicated with year-month-day in the format “yyyy-mm-dd”. There are 15 columns allocated.
To measure the effect of measures and ensure continuous improvement, relevant KPIs should be exchanged between the parties.
Primary KPI is forecast deviation – purchase forecast from wholesaler to supplier – to be exchanged
Forecast deviation is defined here as the purchase forecast from wholesaler to supplier measured against the actual order from wholesaler to supplier per D-pack (SKU). Frequency can vary. Goals and thresholds/limits are agreed upon bilaterally. Both parties measure forecast deviation and exchange this in ongoing dialogue, as outlined in the section on Regular Bilateral Dialogue below.
Remaining shelf life in % – to be exchanged
One of the main goals of this standard is to contribute to reduced food waste. Various factors influence the development of food waste. The industry assumes that increased remaining shelf life through the value chain generally contributes to reduced food waste, and that measuring changes in remaining shelf life will therefore be a relevant indicator.
Further definition is under development and will be added to the standard.
Other KPIs – Recommended to be exchanged:
The exchange and evaluation of relevant KPIs are part of the bilateral dialogue between the chain/wholesaler and the supplier. The industry has a clear ambition to enhance this dialogue. It is important to establish bilateral platforms where chains and their suppliers can align mutual expectations and results. If such a platform is not already established, both parties may initiate an agreement to set this up, with responsibility lying with the wholesaler. The platform should be established for all suppliers, large and small. Meetings can be physical or digital. The dialogue should be regular, but the frequency will vary based on both parties’ needs. It is assumed that relevant functions with sufficient decision-making authority from both sides will participate.
The industry agreement on reducing food waste was signed between the authorities and a unified food industry in June 2017. The goal of the agreement is to halve food waste in Norway by 2030, in line with the UN’s Sustainable Development Goals. A government-appointed Food Waste Committee delivered a report on January 3, 2024, with recommendations for new and enhanced measures to achieve the halving target. One of the recommended measures is standardized and increased data sharing in the value chain. STAND has developed this standard on behalf of the Food Waste Committee.
The standard defines the format and exchange frequency for purchase forecasts from wholesalers to suppliers in the grocery industry. The purpose of the standard is to contribute to a significant reduction in food waste, as well as to improve the efficiency of goods and information flow in the industry. Furthermore, the standard aims for continuous improvement. This will be achieved through the exchange of defined KPIs and structured bilateral dialogue. To achieve these goals, it is also assumed that suppliers are capable of sending high-quality order confirmations to wholesalers. This means order confirmation down to the product line level and that the stated volume/quantity of products can be delivered at the desired delivery time. Regarding the exchange of other types of information between wholesalers and suppliers, such as the wholesaler’s sales to stores, POS data in stores, and inventory levels, this can be exchanged. This type of exchange is agreed upon and implemented bilaterally.
The purchase forecasts sent by the wholesaler to the supplier include:
a) Normal Sales: New products, phase-outs, and assortment changes should be included in the purchase forecast for normal sales. For new products, a clear distinction must be made between forecasts and orders.
b) Campaign Forecasts: Purchase forecasts for campaigns are included in the figures from wholesaler to supplier along with purchase forecasts for normal sales. To inform about purchase forecasts for campaigns, such as volume, it is recommended to exchange additional information between wholesaler and supplier. Note the handling of pre-orders. A pre-order means a physical order from the wholesaler to the supplier. The wholesaler has already sent the order. This should not be part of the purchase forecast.
c) Seasonal Products: Seasonal products are defined in STAND as “a product sold in a time-limited period related to a season defined by the parties involved.” A distinction is made here between seasonal products and contract sales. Seasonal products are characterized by being ordered from the wholesaler and delivered by the supplier continuously throughout the season. Seasonal products are included in the normal purchase forecast from wholesaler to supplier. Contract sales are characterized by an agreement being made for each product between the wholesaler and the supplier. For contract sales, a volume of the product to be delivered by the supplier to the wholesaler is locked in. Suppliers do not need purchase forecasts for contract sales. However, since no order has been sent from the wholesaler to the supplier, the contract sale for this product will appear as part of the purchase forecast sent by the wholesaler to the supplier. The supplier will then disregard the purchase forecast for these products
The exchange frequency for purchase forecasts is weekly. More frequent exchanges can be agreed upon bilaterally for U-1, U-2, and U-3.
Purchase forecasts from wholesaler to supplier are sent in Excel file format from wholesaler to supplier. The files are sent via email. There is no need for explicit identification of wholesaler and supplier in these emails. The emails are sent from/to email addresses that have been agreed upon in advance.
Two different files should be exchanged:
a. File A contains purchase forecasts per week for weeks 1 – 13. Column headers are EPD number, product description, number of units for the week number (year + calendar week).
b. File B contains purchase forecasts per day for the next three weeks (U–1, U–2, and U–3). Column headers are EPD number, product description, number of units per day that the wholesaler retrieves from the supplier.
The content in the Excel sheets is specified as follows:
EPD number (File A and File B) identifies the ordering unit (D-pack) from wholesaler to supplier. See https://tradesolution.no/tjenester/epd/. Here, the EPD number is defined with 8 digits. Product name/description: It is recommended to use the same description as registered in the EPD database. Length is up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Number of units per week: This refers to the number of ordering units (D-pack), unless otherwise agreed between the parties. Here, the number of units of the EPD number in the purchase forecast for weeks 1 – 13 is recorded. The week number is indicated with “year-week number” in the format “yyyy-ww” from week 1 to 13. There are 13 columns allocated.
Number of units per day: This refers to the number of ordering units (D-pack), unless otherwise agreed between the parties. Here, the number of units of the EPD number in the daily purchase forecast that the wholesaler retrieves from the supplier for the next three weeks U-1, U-2, U-3 is recorded. The day is indicated with year-month-day in the format “yyyy-mm-dd”. There are 15 columns allocated.
To measure the effect of measures and ensure continuous improvement, relevant KPIs should be exchanged between the parties.
Primary KPI is forecast deviation – purchase forecast from wholesaler to supplier – to be exchanged
Forecast deviation is defined here as the purchase forecast from wholesaler to supplier measured against the actual order from wholesaler to supplier per D-pack (SKU). Frequency can vary. Goals and thresholds/limits are agreed upon bilaterally. Both parties measure forecast deviation and exchange this in ongoing dialogue, as outlined in the section on Regular Bilateral Dialogue below.
Remaining shelf life in % – to be exchanged
One of the main goals of this standard is to contribute to reduced food waste. Various factors influence the development of food waste. The industry assumes that increased remaining shelf life through the value chain generally contributes to reduced food waste, and that measuring changes in remaining shelf life will therefore be a relevant indicator.
Further definition is under development and will be added to the standard.
Other KPIs – Recommended to be exchanged:
The exchange and evaluation of relevant KPIs are part of the bilateral dialogue between the chain/wholesaler and the supplier. The industry has a clear ambition to enhance this dialogue. It is important to establish bilateral platforms where chains and their suppliers can align mutual expectations and results. If such a platform is not already established, both parties may initiate an agreement to set this up, with responsibility lying with the wholesaler. The platform should be established for all suppliers, large and small. Meetings can be physical or digital. The dialogue should be regular, but the frequency will vary based on both parties’ needs. It is assumed that relevant functions with sufficient decision-making authority from both sides will participate.
Reducing food waste is an overall goal in society. Food waste related to exceeding the limit values of shelf life between the parties in the value chain, constitutes a significant part.
Surveys shows that food waste are significantly reduced if the store and the consumer have a larger part of the total shelf life.
It is therefore a goal that the producer and distributor consume the least amount of available time and that the maximum amount of time is exposed to the consumer.
The grocery industry has defined one Table for allocation of shelf life of a product which regulates the responsibility for and expectations the recipient of products has, linked to shelf life. Online players with b2c sales will be defined as retailers when dividing total shelf life.
In case of minor exceedances of the table’s limit values, participants are expected to seek solutions that provide the lowest possible food waste.
The parties are encouraged to develop performance and collaborate to reduce consumption of shelf life.
To ensure efficient utilization of production facilities, transport, storage and retail systems, etc., all packaging levels – Consumer Units (CU), Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and Distribution Units (DU) must be adapted to the modular system.
The modular system is based on physical goals; length, width and height.
The starting point for the modular system is a Basic module.
This has the dimensions; 600 mm * 400 mm and must be adjusted to a height as one Standard pallet (this amounts to 1050 mm ex. pallet, 1200 mm incl. pallet.
When optimizing an existing product, a deviation of a maximum of 49 mm is allowed.
This allows a total height including pallet of 1249 mm.
All pallets with total height above standard 1200mm with maximum height of 1250 mm to be agreed bilaterally between supplier and their customers.
Example of optimized pallet with base module 600 x 400 mm
Examples of sizes that are widely used on Stock Keeping Units (SKU), and which are customized to basic modules
The Distribution Unit (DU) is the unit the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is stacked on / packed in for transport to distributor.
Design of a Standard pallet (Standard pallet and Standard pallet – Low)
A Standard pallet must contain the same product (same GTIN) with a fixed number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU), in a fixed pallet pattern, with equal number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU)on each layer, and where labelling of unique product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) is possible.
The pallet structure shall contain as little excess volume of “air” as possible.
Standard pallet
Maximum pallet height must be 1200 mm incl. pallet. All pallets with total height above standard 1200mm with maximum height of 1250 mm to be agreed bilaterally between supplier and their customers.
Tolerance limit for existing products is 1249 mm.
Standard pallet – Low
Maximum pallet height shall be 600 mm incl. pallet.
Standard pallet – Low is used for low-frequency products and for products with short shelf life.
Principles for the construction of a palletpattern, central in calculation of top load weight, ref Top load labelling system.
When creating a pallet pattern, the following applies:
Types of pallet pattern
When constructing Distribution Units (DU), the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be placed in accordance with a given pallet pattern. These are referred to as bond stacking and column stacking. Pallets can also be built as a combination of bond stacking and column stacking.
Bond Stacking
Bond Stacking means that the units on every other layer are different, thus locking each other to a greater or lesser extent, but it reduces the compressive strength by approx. 40%.
Example of good pallet utilization and stacking with bond stacking, for good stability.
Column Stacking
Column stacking means stacking packages on top of each other without overlapping with other packages. This form of stacking gives maximum strength in terms of pressure load due to that the corners have better roll stiffness than the sides, but the stack gives poor stability without additional use of shrink wrap, strap, ribbon or similar.
Example of column stacking in the lower pallet layers, and bond stacking on the top layer. Combining the different stacking methods achieves good stack strength on the lower layers while the pallet is locked on top.
This is often a good alternative to intermediate pallet sheets.
Use of plastic to secure the pallet through the value chain
Use of intermediate pallet sheets
Intermediate pallet sheets must be minimized and used only if this is necessary to ensure quality and transportability of the pallet.
Intermediate pallet sheets are preferred if the alternative to this is intermediate cartons, “Ears” on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) or use of corner trims.
Where intermediate pallet sheets are used, the following requirements apply:
See also Automated storage at distributor – greater understanding of the depalletization process
Example of intermediate pallet sheet that does not meet quality requirements. The intermediate pallet sheet is a thin paper and is not suitable for automatic warehouse systems
Example of what happens when using “thin paper” intermediate pallet sheets.
The sheet is hanging down in the robot. It blocks for sensors that check that the layer is separated from the rest of the pallet. The robot will stop, and manual error correction must be carried out before the machine can be restarted.
Example of pallet with intermediate pallet sheets, too big – hanging on outside the pallet.
Is not suitable.
Intermediate pallet sheets with holes. Is not suitable.
The priority target measures can be combined in different ways, to create Combined target measures.
STAND has defined 3 examples:
Target measure Delivery Order – Availability
The target measure “Delivery Order” gives the proportion of the orders that are properly delivered.
Definition:
Quantity of complete orders delivered | = Level of Order Delivery |
Total number of orders ordered |
A complete delivery order contains all ordered sales units, in the correct quantity
Availability will primarily be measured as the priority target measure “Proper Quantity – Availability”, but to calculate the combined measurements below, it is a prerequisite that “Delivery Order – Availability” is calculated.
Complete orders at the right time – Availability & Reliability
The target measure describes both accessibility and reliability in the interaction.
The target measure is composed of the target measures:
Definition:
Availability expressed per order
– Quantity of late or early delivery orders |
= Complete orders at the right time |
Total quantity of orders |
Only one error per. order is counted
The measurement of “Complete Orders at the Right Time” shall be done at the place of arrival. At Incoterms Ex Works delivery terms, this is the supplier’s ramp
The perfect order
This is the most demanding target measure and measures all types of deviations regarding complete orders.
The target measure is composed of three previously defined target measures:
Definition:
Quantity of complete orders delivered
– late or early delivery orders – Orders with missing or incorrect documents – Orders with credit / debit notes |
= The perfect order |
Total quantity of orders |
Only one error per. order is counted
If both the supplier and the customer’s obligations are considered in the target measure, the target measure represents the performance that the parties create in common.
Examples of calculation of service level for combined target measures can be found in the document
Examples of combined target measures
The supplier and the retail chain shall keep each other updated in all circumstances that may be relevant for successful assortment change.
Sales and inventory data are made available as soon as they can be communicated.
Target measures
Service Level – for wholesaler and retailer – are measured and exchanged.
For definition of service level refer to Service level – Purpose, types of target measures and assumptions with any clarifications in the retail chain / supplier agreement.
In case of significant deviations in service levels, assortment coding and forecasts are therefore natural reference points.
Any delay must be notified immediately with the information available at the time of notification. Message must be sent to the department of category /purchase and the department of logistics.
In case of delay, a distinction is made between notified and unannounced.
Read more about:
Routine of notified delays (A7 in timeline)
Current deadlines are available in section for downloads.
The feedback from the retail chain should include:
If the retail chain’s assortment selection of products leads to a supplier deciding to cancel or postpone launch, this should be reported to the relevant retail chain’s category manager by latest Friday at U-6.
For products being discontinued, any deviations from ordinary down sale must be clearly communicated in a reasonable time.
In case of product shortages at the supplier, the volume as confirmed in U-6 (A4 in timeline) is used as the basis of deviation handling ref.
Routine for delay from supplier / Private label
However, order confirmation of orders (A6) delivered no later than Tuesday in U-3 is to be considered as a binding agreement. Order confirmations will be given Wednesday U-3 (A6.1). Current deadlines are available in section for downloads.
Products distributed over distributor, via Crossdock or directly to retailers following the same path.
The timeline indicates the very last deadline for completion of the respective activity.
Many of the activities are sequential, where startup assumes that previous activities have been completed.
Where possible, encourage mutual involvement as early as possible in the process to reduce costs and uncertainties. See also Communication and data exchange
The retail chains will operate with different forms, but they largely contain the same.
Current deadlines are available in section for downloads.
The target measures are based on three important dimensions in the term «service level»:
The priority targets measures should be followed and evaluated continuously with focus on level, trends and development.
Target measures Correct quantity – availability
The target measure “Correct quantity” measures availability as precision in quantity delivered.
Definition:
Number of delivered sales Units | = Availability |
Quantity of ordered sales Units |
The quantity ordered is the amount that the customer initially ordered.
Not delivered quantity represents deviations in delivery.
Target measure At the right time – reliability
The target measure “At the right time” measure reliability as precision in delivery time.
The target measure is used to measure compliance with time limits defined in the agreement between the parties.
The target measure can be used along several dimensions in the value chain.
Examples may be if orders are sent at the right time, if order confirmations are sent at the right time, if delivery is picked up at the right time, if Despatch Advice is sent at the right time, etc.
Definition (with example order):
Number of late or early delivery orders | = Reliability |
Total quantity of orders |
Delayed or premature is determined by whether exchange / delivery is within the agreed time frame.
At Incoterms Ex Works delivery terms, the assessment of the supplier’s reliability is on the supplier’s ramp.
The delivery is received when the order / delivery etc., is acknowledged for.
Target measures Correct Administration – Security
The target measure “Proper Administration” measures security as compliance between what is ordered in the order and what has been delivered and has been invoiced, that is, the correct product without errors and with the correct documentation.
Definition:
Quantity of orders without credit / debit notes | = SAFETY |
Total quantity of orders |
Correct administration means that Despatch Advice, shipping notes, invoices etc. are complete and error-free in relation to the delivery.
Only credit and debit notes affecting physical delivery are included in the measurement.
The target measure can also be used to measure the quality of orders from the customer.
Examples of calculation of service level for priority target measures can be found in the document
Examples of priority target measures
Background
The need for information both in trade and to the consumer is constantly increasing. Today’s solution using the EAN-13 barcode does not provide opportunities for additional machine-readable information. The need for more information has led to products that have more than one bar code applied to Consumer Units, which creates challenges both at the checkout point (POS) and in the value chain. Often this is a QR code with a link to a website where the consumer can find more information.
In parallel with the need for more communication with consumers, a need is emerging at the retail level to gain more control over the traceability and expiry date of the products, to ensure safe food and reduce food waste. This is happening in most countries in the world. In Norway, GS1 Norway, together with Matvett, established a working group consisting of representatives from brand suppliers, grocery chains, system suppliers and other stakeholders to discuss these issues. These guidelines are a result of this work and have now been included as part of STAND’s framework for the Norwegian grocery industry.
Purpose of the use of 2D barcodes in Norwegian grocery
Although 2D barcodes are not the only solution to the challenges, this is the data carrier of the future, where the need for information is greater than just identifying a product with GTIN. 2D barcodes take up less space, can contain more information about the product, are a tool for reducing food waste and increase food security, are more flexible, and can be read by mobile phones. This provides an opportunity for increased consumer contact. In addition, 2D barcodes can solve all needs for information exchange throughout the supply chain, including being able to link to websites.
Different types of 2D barcodes
There are many different 2D barcodes, but only some of them can be used in connection with the GS1 standards, which are the standards used by the Norwegian grocery industry. The different 2D barcodes are also used for different purposes. This is regulated in GS1’s regulations, General Specifications. The difference between the different 2D barcodes helps to determine what they can be used for.
QR Code
The QR Code barcode is in the GS1 system defined to be used only with GS1 Digital Link URI syntax. In practice, this means that this should only be used for communication with the consumer via a URL that links to a website with more information that the consumer can read with his mobile phone. QR Code has grown to become the preferred barcode for consumer communication and most mobile phones today are able to read this with the built-in camera app in the phone. This means that the threshold for reading QR Code is low among consumers, and it is less need for training and communication to put functionality related to QR Code into production. Here you can find more information about QR codes.
GS1 Datamatrix
GS1 Datamatrix is a variant of Datamatrix that uses GS1 Element String syntax. This is the use of AI (Application Identifier) structure. This is a way of structuring the information in the barcode so that everyone who reads the barcode understands the content in the same way regardless of the order in which the information is printed and how much information is in the barcode. According to GS1 General Specifications, GS1 Datamatrix is only permitted for use on Consumer units with variable measure and prescription medicines. However, it is permitted to use it in limited pilots, for test purposes and in closed value chains under controlled conditions. The advantage of GS1 Datamatrix is that it has high compression and error correction. It can be printed both square and rectangular so that it can fit where there is not enough height, but enough width to get the information needed without compromising on size and thus readability. However, the rectangular version has a limit on the amount of data that can be used. GS1 Datamatrix is the only permitted barcode on prescription drugs. Here you can find more information about GS1 Datamatrix.
Content in barcode
A minimum requirement for information attributes has been defined for POS purposes.
This is:
It is possible to use other Application Identifiers for internal and/or external needs, but this is then up to each individual actor to use.
Alarm / Notification
An incident can occur in all steps of the value chain, at the consumer, retailer, distributor or at the supplier itself. It is important that the supplier is notified as soon as possible.
Notification of an incident shall be given to one alert point at each operator. The alert point should be agreed in advance and always be staffed / available.
The industry has decided that for products registered in the Tradesolution EPD base, Tradesolution ReCall portal should be used for blocking, recall or withdrawal. Access is available at epd@tradesolution.no
For products not registered in the Tradesolution EPD base, a Notification schema for recall, withdrawal or blocking of a product may be used provided that this has been agreed between the supplier and the distributor/wholesaler. Notification schema can be downloaded from Downloads.
Required information to follow an alarm / alert
To identify the scope of the alarm / alert, the product’s GTIN / EPD, best before date, batch / Lot number and SSCC on affected pallets must always be stated. This applies regardless of whether the product is registered in the Tradesolution EPD base or not.
By using the portal, the supplier gets / is secured
The ReCall portal can also be used in situations where you want to withdraw products with quality defects.
Distributors have built their own systems and routines for alerting crisis situations and blocking the products at their distribution warehouses and retailers. This is not part of the ReCall portal.
The following routine applies when registering an incident or crisis
The practical implementation of the routine is described here Routine when registering an incident or crisis, in the Tradesolution ReCall portal.
Conclusion
Through the guidelines, the industry contributes to satisfying consumers’ demands and expectations for safe products, provided that an overall industry complies with the guidelines.
Should an incident or crisis occur, there are routines and tools that, in a simple, fast and secure way, limit incidental damage.
An accurate and limited recall or withdrawal will be possible.
This reduces costs for all parties in the value chain and minimizes potential reputational loss.
The main purpose of the tracking information is to lay the groundwork for effective blocking, withdrawal or recall of products.
Central tracking information is:
It is a requirement that the products are labeled to enable tracking.
The marking must be affixed to the product packaging and legible.
The following applies to finished goods traded between supplier and distributor / retailer:
Information to be marked:
Load carrier (for example pallet) shall be marked with SSCC.
The sender must in his system have an overview of which recipient the product was sent to, and also the recipient must have an overview of which sender the product was received from. Both sender and recipient must be identified with GLN.
Sender shall in his system register:
Recipient shall in his system register:
The following applies to raw materials and other inputs:
More about tracking information and how the product can be tracked in the value chain is described here Recommended traceability methods in the value chain.
If unwanted incidents or crises occur, it is important to be well prepared.
Possible scenarios for what might arise should be thought through and how this should be handled.
A Contingency Plan must be prepared that will allow you to cope with the situation quickly, correctly and effectively. The Contingency Plan must be accurate and accessible to all involved at all times.
The Contingency Plan includes:
See more about the Contingency Plan here Design and contents of a Contingency Plan.
At the heart of the legislation is the duty of each company to carry out a risk analysis of the health risks the products represent and how the company will relate to this in terms of traceability.
The purpose of the analysis is to reduce / prevent risk through
This assumes that the parties are aware of the risks the products may pose and have a preparedness that ensures that they react quickly, correctly and effectively in unwanted incidents. A Risk Analysis should therefore be performed on new products based on an intended relevant incident, so that it can be implemented as quickly as possible should a real incident occur for the product.
The risk analysis consists of three elements that both the government and industry should work on in an equal way:
See more about risk analysis here Design and content of a Risk Analysis.
The purpose of a standard for labelling of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU) with subsequent electronic data interchange (EDI) is to:
The basis for this is the labelling of each Distribution Unit (DU) with a unique SSCC.
This code is the main key in the electronic Despatch Advice and is linked to information about which GTIN which the Distribution Unit (DU) consists of, the number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) batch / lot number and shelf life information if applicable.
SSCC is the most important key for traceability of Distributions Units (DU), see Recommended way to track and trace a product in the value chain.
For that reason SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
Recommended way to track and trace a product in the value chain
Efficiency and traceability are achieved primarily through:
To ensure rational product and information flow in the distribution chain, STAND recommends a uniform labelling of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and Distribution Units (DU).
This simplifies the labelling of the manufacturer / supplier, shipment by shipper / freight forwarders and merchandise at distributor / store.
This labelling concept also applies to types of transport units other than pallets.
For fish and fish products, the following applies:
STAND has decided to refer to Norwegian Standard NS17099:2020 “Information technology — Fishery and aquaculture products — Requirements for labelling of distribution units and pallets in the trade of fishery and aquaculture products” for products that fall under this category. This standard replaces todays NS9405: 2014 “Fish and fish products. Requirements for labelling of distribution units and pallets in the trade of fish and fish products», and is valid as from 30. September 2020.
It can be ordered from Standard Norway.
This is an animation that show what pallets are valid for distribution.
Requirements specifications can be downloaded here:
Requirements for approved EUR-pallets
Specification for reusable 1/1 plastic pallet
Specification for reusable 1/2 plastic pallet
Requirements specification for reusable 1/3 plastic pallet (from NLP)
Specification for reusable 1/4 plastic pallet
Requirements Specification reusable 1/2 wooden pallet
Requirements specification for 1/3 and 1/2 disposable cardboard pallet
It is a prerequisite for maintaining strength, that Stock Keeping Units (SKU) are placed within the edges of the pallet with a small margin.
Devices placed on or outside the edge can cause damage with subsequent reduced carrying capacity / risk of injury.
The pallet area should be utilized as best as possible with products. By following the Modular system optimal use of the pallet is ensured and reduces the risk of the load shifting during transport.
Overhang is not accepted.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is the unit the retailer buys.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) occurs in various forms, such as carton, reusable box / pallet box, intermediate carton and such.
The most important task of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is to secure Consumer Units (CU) from the time of manufacturing until it is finished exposed in a shop shelf.
The number of Consumer Units (CU) in a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is determined by the manufacturer, preferably in dialogue with the distributor / retail chain.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be adapted to the modular system, see Modular system
for picking and grouping of products can be done as efficient as possible.
Case fill rate shall be calculated. This is described in Case fill rate
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be designed to withstand the strain required in the value chain.
Automatic warehouses require that Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must be packed in a way that it can be lifted, stacked, clamped and handled with different mechanized devices, see Automated warehouse at distributor – greater understanding of the depalletization process.
Design requirements and packaging
When designing a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), it must be based on the modular system.
This means that the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should not be less than 100 x 150 mm and not more than 400 x 600 mm.
Example of best practices
Modular Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is not adapted to the modular system.
The size of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must consider the size of the shelf space for the current product group.
The short side of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should be front where appropriate.
There must be a simple and clear opening guide, preferably with illustration.
The packaging must be opened without using a knife.
When the Consumer Units (CU) is exposed in the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), the least possible of the Stock Keeping Unit’s (SKU) packaging should be visible when exposed in the store shelf.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must not weigh more than 15 kg.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be in recyclable cardboard or plastic.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Lid / plastic film is missing, which may cause Consumer Unit (CU) to fall out during internal transport.
Plastic boxes – all variants – must be considered to work in automated warehouse handling.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be form stable.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is form stable.
Example of best practices
Form stable Stock Keeping Units (SKU) that embraces close to its content and is strong enough to not deform.
Resists load on inbound transport (2 pallets in height), as well as handling through the value chain.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Not form stable. Do not resist strain on inbound transport (2 pallets in height), as well as handling through the value chain.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) that is only wrapped in plastic foil must have a tray / trough below.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) on tray / trough with plastic wrap.
Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must have straight sides.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with straight sides.
Glue quality and amount of glue on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be such that glued surfaces do not loosen.
Example of best practices
Glue quality and amount of glue is such that glued surfaces do not loosen.
Constructed example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Too little glue / too few glue points are included that flap gaps with subsequent stops in automatic warehouse systems.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should be stackable and “ears” should only be used where it is necessary for stability.
Should “ears” be used, these should not exceed 5mm and should not be used in conjunction with intermediate pallet sheets.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should not have loose lid.
The lid must be attached to the tray / trough in such a way that it does not loosen during handling. It is recommended to use glue points or a locking mechanism.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must have a center of gravity relative to the base that allows it to be handled on conveyor belts.
The height / width ratio should be below 1.7 to ensure that the products do not fall under internal transport in an automatic warehouse.
Example of best practices
The ratio height / width is below 1.7.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
The height / width ratio is over 1.7, which means that the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) can fall during internal transport.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) exposure front should not be less than 30 mm, regardless of the chosen solution.
The information on the Consumer Unit (CU) must be visible.
Packaging capacity
During the design of the product and packaging it must be considered that the outer dimensions of the finished Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), tray and otherwise, under the load of the above-mentioned product packaging, due to bulging, is within the margin. In practice, this can be from 0.5 to 1.0 cm.
Optimal transport requires the use of load capacity of the transport systems (weight and height).
Generally, the packaging should be able to carry a similar pallet (2 identical pallets) without any breakage or clamping damage during transport and storage.
Exceptions from this must be specified and labelled on the (Distribution Unit (DU).
Method of calculation of carrying capacity is described in Top load labelling system.
The packaging shall be able to withstand shipping with other products for shipping to the store in a rational way.
In order to achieve the industry’s common goal of efficient flow of products, reduced negative environmental impact, promoted sales and reduced losses, it is important to focus on:
Especially for reusable boxes / pallet boxes
Basically, Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is desired in cardboard, or in combination with plastic.
Reusable boxes are an alternative to Stock Keeping Units (SKU) in corrugated paper but must be agreed bilaterally.
Particularly for Intermediate cartons
The use of Intermediate cartons should be kept as low as possible and must be agreed bilaterally.
Intermediate cartons are accepted in cases where the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) solution is not possible because the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) does not meet the requirements for strength, stability or size and where the use of intermediate pallet sheet on pallet is not possible.
The intermediate carton must be labelled so that it clearly differs from the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and shall not weigh more than 15 kg.
Consumer Unit (CU) is the unit the consumer purchases in store.
Consumer Unit (CU) must be designed to optimize use of shop shelves and other furnishings. In addition, the information on the Consumer Unit (CU) should be visible even when the package is on a tray on the shelf.
Consumer Unit (CU) should be easy to open and to use.
Consumer Unit (CU) should be, included Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU) adapted to the modular system, see Modular system
Unnecessary volume not containing the product itself in the packaging should be limited to what is necessary to protect the product. If necessary, secure against shrinkage (small, valuable Consumer Units (CU)).
Quantity (packing content) in Consumer Unit (CU) is determined by manufacturer, preferably in dialogue with distributor / retail chain.
Case fill rate shall be calculated. This is described in Case fill rate
On new products, it is expected that the case fill rate is higher than the average of the product group to which it belongs.
Measurement of the case fill rate related to the product launch windows was carried out by DMF until 2018. When switching to a new product classification system, historical data could not be compared, as the timeline and product groupings from 2014 were changed.
Efforts to increase the case fill rate in the grocery industry are important from both an environmental and efficiency perspective.
In collaboration with the industry, Tradesolution has developed some new reports for measuring the case fill rate in the grocery industry. Suppliers and retailer chains that have access to the EPD base can see the case fill rate for the products they have access to directly in the database. Here you can see the actual case fill rate on basic product (BASIS-level) and calculated case fill rate for the packaging levels above.
Log in her and feel free to contact the EPD base helpdesk at epd@tradesolution.no if you have further questions.
The grocery industry has a common goal of being able to:
when products are being developed/changed.
To achieve this, it is crucial to standardize and optimize packaging on the product at all packaging levels – Consumer Unit (CU), Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU).
STAND has therefore prepared a standard for this, which applies to all packaging levels.
Audience for the standard is managers and everyone who works with product development, assortment and logistics in the value chain.
By complying with the standard, processes in the value chain are optimized and gains can be extracted in a number of areas such as:
Warehouse
Outbound transport
Inbound transport
Shop
Consumer
In addition, optimization of packaging through compliance with the standard will reduce environmental impact at all stages in the value chain, as part of the industry agreement with the authorities.
The packaging must be:
Easy to sort
In order for the packaging to be able to be recycled, it is important that it is sorted correctly by the end user and thus enters the correct recycling stream. There are a number of steps you can take when designing the packaging, which increase the likelihood that it will be sorted correctly. This information is summarized at https://www.grontpunkt.no/design-for-kildesortering
Recyclable
In order for the packaging to be material-recycled and become new raw material that can be used to make new products, it is important that this is taken into account in the packaging design and material selection. To find out how recyclable the packaging is and what steps can be taken to improve this, you can enter the packaging in https://kalkulator.grontpunkt.no
In monomaterial if possible
The easiest way to make it more intuitive for the end user to sort the packaging correctly, and to make it easier to recycle the packaging, is to ensure that the packaging only consists of one material.
From recycled material if possible
Most packaging is recycled, but there is too little demand for recycled material. By using recycled material when developing new packaging, you ensure that the circular material flows work and thus both reduce the need for virgin raw material and the environmental burdens these entail.
Important notice
All products must follow the GS1 Allocation rules. (chapter 2.4). These are international rules and are mainly based on the fact that a change of over 20% to a physical dimension, on any axis, or gross weight, requires assignment of a new GTIN.
In addition, the following applies to Norway:
Exception from the standard
Under special conditions, exceptions from industry standards and guidelines may be relevant.
Exceptions must be agreed separately between the parties concerned and shall be described in Checklist for optimization of Consumer Unit (CU), Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU).
The check list can be downloaded as a separate document.
The committee was established in 1998.
The committee consists of four representatives and four substitute members from each of the organizations DLF (Grocery suppliers of Norway) and DMF AS (Norwegian Grocery Sector’s Environmental Forum). In addition, GS1 Norway has a role as observer. The leader and secretariat are allocated to DLF and DMF and rotate every second year.
The committee has prepared recommendations for the grocery industry, which can be found on STAND’s website www.stand.no .
STAND will develop and recommend relevant framework and guidelines contributing to sustainable and effective supply chains in the Norwegian grocery sector*.
This includes topics relevant for the flow of goods and information, such as:
Matters related to sustainability and food waste must be emphasized in particular.
The committee’s work should as far as possible be based on international standards.
STAND’s recommendations, in terms of standards and guidelines, will be valid when incorporated in the bilateral agreements between the parties.
* The guidelines are developed for use within the grocery sector. Relevant topics are also suitable for use within convenience and catering.
The standards must be of high quality and developed to be generally accepted in the grocery industry. The work is based on the following routines for the preparation, implementation and follow-up of all recommendations:
The standards must be open and voluntarily in the grocery industry. STAND’s activities and recommendations must always be within the framework of current competition law.
Each party cover their own costs of participation in STAND.
Projects launched by STAND are financed equally by industry and retail, invoiced by Tradesolution.
Possible participation in international forums on behalf of STAND is agreed separately.
There are currently several persons and committees working with standardization within, or in connection with the grocery value chain. STAND has the responsibility to make the best use of resources through coordinating inputs and ideas, avoiding duplication and strengthening implementation through focusing on measures by uniformly recognizable presentation.
STAND’s standards are posted on the website and other standards such as GS1 are linked from STAND’s website, so industry representatives can find unified standards and guidelines via one single point of entry: www.stand.no
Approved by the board in DMF 30.6.05 and by the board in DLF 31.8.05.
Latest revised September 2023.
The parties may make changes to the mandate if necessary.
Checklist for optimization of Consumer Unit (CU), Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU)
The checklist is a declaration that the standard is complied with
Download the exchange agreement here
Barcode syntax
The use of GS1 Digital Link
GS1 Digital Link is a standard that has been developed to give consumers an opportunity to find more information about a product by reading the barcode on an item with their mobile phone. GS1 Digital Link can also provide manufacturers with information about where the product is read, in which situations it is read and other additional information about consumer behaviour.
The GS1 Digital Link standard defines several ways to do this.
One can either have an app that is connected to a resolver (a kind of translator) that interprets the content of the barcode and adapts it to what desire or need there is for information in the setting the barcode is read. If you use a resolver, you can read all types of barcodes that contain a GS1 identifier (GTIN, GLN, SSCC, etc.).
You can also use the mobile phone’s built-in camera app to read barcodes that contain a GS1 Digital Link structure, but this sets requirements for the type of barcode used. To be sure that all smartphones on the market can interpret the information, one should use QR Code. This is the barcode type supported by most phones.
In the barcode you enter a URL in addition to GTIN and any additional attributes.
When the barcode is read by the camera app on a smartphone, you will be routed to the website with information about the product that is entered in the barcode.
If you use an app with a resolver, the URL that is entered in the barcode can be replaced with the URL that is entered in the resolver so that the reader can get the corrected information depending on which options are available in the app used.
The physical size of a 2D barcode varies according to the amount of information contained in it. The resolution of the barcode (X-dimension) must be a minimum of 0.375mm and a maximum of 0.990mm when using GS1 AI syntax in the barcode on Consumer unit.
The resolution of the barcode (X-dimension) must be a minimum of 0.396 and a maximum of 0.990mm when using GS1 Digital Link URI syntax in the barcode on consumer unit.
Quality and life span of the barcode
2D barcodes are verified according to the ISO standard ISO / IEC 15415. This is an international standard that describes the quality requirements for barcodes and how easy they are to read. Highest grade is 4.0 / 20/660. The minimum requirement is 1.5 / 20/660. The numbers indicate; character / aperture / wavelength of the light illuminating the barcode.
The service life of a barcode depends on the type of label material used and where / how the label is placed on the product. Label material / printing method must be chosen that has at least as long a shelf life as the assessed shelf life of the product to be labelled.
Placement of the barcode on the product
If 2 barcodes are placed on the product, a linear and a 2D barcode for use in POS or a linear and a GS1 Digital Link for consumer engagement or two 2D barcodes for both POS and consumer engagement, efforts should be made to place them adjacent on the packaging. This ensures that the barcode is read regardless of which barcode contains what you want to read. Programming the barcode scanners to ignore the type of code that should not be read will prevent erroneous readings.
Readability of the barcode
The readability of the barcode depends on the size of the barcode, the type of barcode reader and the distance from the barcode to the barcode reader. If the requirements for size and quality are followed, this is in accordance with industry standards and the barcodes can be read at a normal distance with normal equipment.
QR Code with GS1 Digital Link syntax for consumer engagement
For those manufacturers who wish to have a structured way of communicating with consumers, it is QR Code with GS1 Digital Link structure that should be used. By using GS1 Digital Link structure with GTIN coded in, it opens for all links in the value chain to provide targeted information to the person scanning the barcode. The consumer can obtain all available information from the manufacturer and / or the trade link. This is a barcode that can be read by most smartphones with its built-in camera app. In addition, consumers are used to the fact that QR Code can be read with the smartphone and give them more information. By splitting the information to be used for POS purposes and consumer-oriented communication, the QR Code with information to the consumer can also be pre-printed on the packaging and this will reduce the need for changes to the production equipment.
QR Code with consumer-oriented information can also be placed on the packaging together with the current EAN-13 barcode where it is not yet possible or desirable to have a 2D barcode with dynamic information for POS purposes.
Barcode syntax – The use of GS1 Element String (Application Identifiers (AI))
GS1 application identifiers (AI) are numeric prefixes used in barcodes to define the meaning of and syntax of information elements. AIs makes it possible to separate different information elements from one another in a barcode. In the text below or next to a barcode, these appear as numbers in parentheses and the content of the individual AI follows accordingly. A GS1 barcode is required to use AIs.
GS1 has defined over 100 application identifiers (AIs). Each application identifier is a standard two-, three- or four-digit number code. For the full list of GS1 application identifiers and their definitions, see section 3.2 of the GS1 General Specification.
Barcode with AI 15 for «Best before date».
Barcode with AI 17 for «Expiry date».
Barcode size
The physical size of a 2D barcode varies according to the amount of information contained in it. The resolution of the barcode (X-dimension) must be a minimum of 0.375mm and a maximum of 0.990mm when using GS1 AI syntax in the barcode on a consumer unit.
The resolution of the barcode (X-dimension) must be a minimum of 0.396 and a maximum of 0.990mm when using GS1 Digital Link URI syntax in the barcode on a consumer unit.
Barcode quality and life span
2D barcodes are verified according to the ISO standard ISO / IEC 15415. This is an international standard that describes the quality requirements for barcodes and the readability. Highest grade is 4.0 / 20/660. The minimum requirement is 1.5 / 20/660. The numbers indicate; character / aperture / wavelength of the light illuminating the barcode.
The life span of a barcode depends on the type of label material used and where / how the label is placed on the product. Label material / printing method must be chosen that has at least as long a shelf life as the assessed shelf life of the product to be labelled.
Placement of the barcode on the product
If 2 barcodes are placed on the product, a linear and a 2D barcode for use in POS or a linear and a GS1 Digital Link for consumer communication or two 2D barcodes for both POS and consumer communication, efforts should be made to place them adjacent on the packaging. This ensures that the barcode is read regardless of which barcode contains what you want to read. Programming the barcode scanners to ignore the type of code that should not be read will prevent erroneous readings.
Readability of the barcode
The readability of the barcode depends on the size of the barcode, the type of barcode reader and the distance from the barcode to the barcode reader. If the requirements for size and quality are followed, this is in accordance with industry standards and the barcodes can be read at a normal distance with normal equipment.
GS1 Datamatrix with Element String (AI’s) syntax for POS purposes
The GS1 AI structure is the same solution that is used to structure data used in the GS1-128 barcode on Trading units and pallets today. This solution will fill all the needs of the industry to get better traceability right down to the checkout (POS) and it provides the necessary information to get better shelf-life control, and to automatic price down products that are approaching the expiration date in time to minimize food waste in stores. A minimum information width has been defined for POS purposes.
This is:
This does not mean that other information elements cannot be entered in the barcode, but this will increase the physical size of the barcode. It is not necessary to have all the information in human readable text next to or below the barcode if this information is elsewhere on the label. However, it is recommended that the minimum GTIN is in human readable text in connection with the barcode (as the example on the right).
EDI – Electronic Data Interchange – is used in the retail industry to exchange commercial documents like Order, Order Receipt, Order Confirmation, Despatch Advice, Invoice and Invoice Receipt.
EDI can be performed in various ways, from fully automated processes both at customer and supplier, to web solutions where information is registered manually.
EDI is used for all distribution types.
Overview of EDI messages and in which processes they are used
Which EDI messages to use will vary with the distribution type.
An overview of this, along with deadlines for when the messages are to be sent, are described in EDI message, type of distribution and deadlines.
Before using EDI, it is necessary to clarify which messages to be used, message formats, exchange methods, electronic message addresses, etc. This documented the EDI Exchange agreement.
This document also specifies other bilateral issues related to the exchange of EDI messages.
To ensure that both parties and all business functions are familiar with all bilateral agreements, it is crucial that the EDI Exchange Agreement is used actively.
How to get started with EDI is described in Implement EDI in the retail trade.
In order to start using EDI, trading documents must be translated into an EDI format.
The following formats are available:
Revisions of the EDI formats, is documented in Change log current version vs. past versions
Develop documentation
STAND makes no direct claim to any documentation that will accompany or document a delivery, as well as the fact that the EDI Despatch Advice is always to be used for distributors or Crossdock deliveries.
For deliveries direct to retailer, there should bilaterally be agreed if the EDI Despatch Advice is to be sent.
It is nevertheless understood that there may be a need for documentation beyond this, such as consignment, transport documents or other accompanying documentation.
In certain types of deliveries or in given situations there may also be legal requirements for which documentation that shall follow the shipment.
The parties must bilaterally agree what documentation is required in addition to the EDI Despatch Advice.
Send Despatch Advice
When the supplier has picked, labelled and clarified delivery for pick-up (at delivery condition Ex Works) at the agreed time and place, the Despatch Advice shall be sent in accordance with deadline.
One Despatch Advice should only include one order. Exceptions to this may occur at Crossdock.
The Despatch Advice should refer to previous orders.
Despatch Advice shall contain only the products and the quantity delivered.
Exceptions to this may occur at Crossdock, but this must be agreed bilaterally.
Distribution Units (DU) must be identified with SSCC (Serial Shipping Container Code) and this information must be sent in the Despatch Advice.
SSCC is the most important tracking key and associates the individual products in the delivery up to which pallet products are located.
The Despatch Advice is shipped with different details of information, depending on which pallet type the delivery consists of or what has been agreed bilaterally.
Normally, what applies:
For Promotional Units, the following formulation applies from STAND:
«The grocery industry has a common goal that all deliveries should be traceable as far as possible through the entire value chain. For Promotional Units, this is achieved only by labelling each Promotion Unit with a unique identifier (SSCC) and include it in the Despatch Advice sent to the retail chain. This ensures traceability all the way to the store.
Today, it is variable practices in suppliers on which level of Despatch Advice is used on Promotional Units. The goal is that the industry part will prepare the systems for sending and using Level 4 of Despatch Advice on Promotional Units before the end of 2019 ».
For those who use TakeCargo for transport, the following applies:
Despatch Advice can also be sent to the load carrier (eg NLP) with information about the number of pallets of each pallet type included in the pallet exchange scheme.
This information enables automatic pallet balance update between customer and supplier.
The use of a Despatch Advice for the update of cargo information must be agreed with a cargo carrier before it is taken into service.
The Despatch Advice can also indicate the number of pallet places the delivery requires in transport. This information allows the distributor at Ex Works to calculate the transport needs, thereby sending the correct size of the lorry when the delivery is to be picked up.
Receive Despatch Advice
Upon receipt of a Despatch Advice, the customer can plan and prepare products receipt.
The use of Despatch Advice simplifies products receipt and contains, in addition to other information, traceability information on the products.
The Despatch Advice number must be unique to each Despatch Advice sent from the supplier.
The buyer shall reject a Despatch Advice with a number that has been received and processed earlier.
How the Despatch Advice is used by the customer in internal systems is not covered by STAND guidelines.
Manage orders and send Order Confirmation
Upon receipt of an order, the supplier shall check that the order complies with the bilateral agreements specified in the EDI Exchange Agreement.
Deadline for sending an Order Confirmation
An Order Confirmation must be sent no later than 3 hours after the order stop time. If not possible to meet the 3-hour deadline, it can be agreed bilaterally what the deadline should be.
For deliveries with order and pick up the same day, bilateral deadlines apply.
Bilateral deadlines must be agreed in writing.
Check for delivery ability
The expected delivery must be confirmed in the Order Confirmation. This means that it must be checked for deliverability.
An Order Confirmation must be sent that confirms what the supplier with a high degree of probability expects will be delivered. The distributor is aware of that there may be a discrepancy between what is confirmed delivered and what is actually delivered. In the case of repeated deviations over time, the parties will enter into a dialogue about how the this can be corrected, in a constructive and flexible way.
It must not be confirmed more than originally ordered without agreement.
When checking for delivery ability, consideration shall be taken regarding any bilateral agreements that allow products to be delivered which, under normal conditions, do not meet the requirements for the distribution of total shelf life between the players. See The establishment of bilateral agreements for the assessment of shelf life
Products that are not covered by a bilateral agreement must have a remaining shelf life that satisfies the requirements for distribution between the players as specified in Table for assessment of shelf life of a product.
Information to be sent for products that are temporarily sold out
If a product is temporarily sold out, it is a request from the distributors that the date for when the product is expected back for sale can be sent in the Order Confirmation. However, this must be agreed bilaterally.
If the supplier does not have systems that can provide this in the Order Confirmation, this information must be exchanged in other bilaterally agreed ways. By exchanging information about when a temporarily out-of-stock product is expected to be available for sale, this can be used actively in the order.
Reservation of quantity for order confirmation
When the order confirmation is sent, the supplier must reserve the quantity that is confirmed delivered to the current order.
Confirmed quantity versus what can be delivered at delivery time
If the order confirmation confirms a quantity that differs from what has been ordered, it is what is stated in the order confirmation that will be included in the delivery to the buyer.
This also applies if the supplier in the meantime will be able to deliver the ordered products.
Requirements for order confirmation
For Crossdock, the following feedback applies in addition to the above:
Receive and process order confirmation
An order confirmation is an end of the procurement process, and the customer should therefore not respond to the order confirmation even though this should have changed according to the order.
The order confirmation number from the supplier must be unique. Recipient shall reject an order confirmation with an order confirmation number received and processed earlier.
How the order confirmation is used by the customer in internal systems is not covered by the STAND guidelines.
Send order
An order is sent in the form of an EDI order, and specifies products / services ordered under the terms agreed between seller and buyer.
The order shall fulfil bilateral agreements specified in the EDI exchange agreement.
The order includes buyer and seller, product, quantity, desired delivery date and place of delivery.
The order must be sent in accordance with the agreed order stop time.
Possible corrections that can be made on an order after it has been sent:
Special relationships related to order
The order number should be unique to each order sent from a buyer.
The supplier must reject an order where the order number is received and processed earlier.
For certain products, there is a bilateral agreement on how to split shelf life between the parties. Look to The establishment of bilateral agreements for the assessment of shelf life.
For EXW delivery terms, the rules dictate one order should only include one delivery from one pick-up point to one place of delivery and one desired delivery date.
For delivery terms where the supplier is responsible for transportation, the same applies, except that the order may contain deliveries from multiple locations.
Receipt of orders and return of order receipt
The supplier, if agreed upon in the EDI Exchange Agreement, shall return an EDI order receipt immediately after the order is received.
Order receipt has the function of confirming to the customer that the supplier has received the order. Order receipt contains no information on whether the customer receives the ordered products.
Receive order receipt
Upon reception of order receipt, it provides the customer with an assurance that the order was received by the supplier.
How order receipt is further used by the customer in internal systems is not covered by the guideline.
Deadline for submission of a control measurement product at EPD Checkpoint / Tradesolution is Friday in U-3 (Timeline A8).
See process description at: www.tradesolution.no
Current deadlines are available in section for downloads.
Product images of all new products should according to the timeline be available in Tradesolutions MediaStore within U-3.
See process description at: www.tradesolution.no
Current deadlines are available in section for downloads.
Distributor will order no later than Tuesday in U-3 to meet expected needs – for pipeline fill and sales in start-up week.
If both parties wish for a different order flow, deviations may be agreed, however, obligations are in accordance with volume confirmation A4.
The order is based on the chain planograms and / or other systems.
The order’s pick-up / delivery time shall provide the supplier with the maximum amount of time required to ensure total coverage and possible discrepancy while safeguarding the cost-effective flow of products to the distributor.
Current deadlines are available in section for downloads.
Launch will not be subject to major deviations between forecast (A4 in timeline) and actual ordering. In general, product news should be ready for pick-up from supplier from Monday U-2, or at the agreed time.
Any delay must be notified immediately with the information available at the time of notification. Message must be sent to the department of category / purchase and department of logistics.
Any delay must be notified immediately with the information available at the time of notification. Message must be sent to the department of category / purchase and the department of logistics.
In the case of inventory-managed in-phasing, the replacement product will most often have the same sales volume and profile as the outgoing product. There will normally be no need for own forecasts but close dialogue about in-phasing time.
With time-managed in-phasing, the forecast is divided into three and determined by the supplier:
Supplier must confirm delivery capacity in U-6.
Tradesolution has developed a portal for the exchange of sales forecasts between supplier and distributor, initially for new launches and assortment changes.
REMA and COOP use this solution, while Norgesgruppen / ASKO uses its own supplier portal.
Example of screenshot from the forecast portal
Assortment change can be done inventory-managed or time-managed.
Inventory-managed assortment change means that outgoing products are sold until inventory is at a low level or sold out and then sales of the new product starts.
In the case of inventory-managed assortment change, new products will replace an outgoing item and / or take over its place in the shelf – link / product connection is used. Sales start will depend on inventory and sales on outgoing item. The supplier and the retail chain must agree which stocks are included and calculate the date of the transition. Campaigns or other steps to make the change can be agreed. It is normal to set a final deadline for the delivery of the outgoing item.
Inventory-managed assortment change significantly reduces the risk of empty shelves and losses throughout the value chain and should be chosen if possible.
Optimal inventory-managed assortment change requires close collaboration between supplier and individual wholesaler, including dialogue on inventories and sales development. It will not be pre-orders from wholesaler in U-3 if inventory-managed in-phase is used. Order and startup are bilaterally agreed.
Time-managed assortment change implies that a date for the start of sale of products is set. Time-managed assortment change is selected when inventory-managed is not optimal, eg by phasing in products that receive heavy sales support or where the physical attributes of the product require rebuilding of shelves. With time-managed in-phase, relevant wholesale warehouses and stores must be filled up at the same time. The volume for this is significant and must be calculated separately – referred to as «pipeline fill»
News to be distributed in several trading chains is launched in one of the industry’s joint launch time frames.
In the meeting where product news is presented, the supplier presents its news and suggestions for product range changes together with:
Any meetings shall be arranged in a reasonable time. Both parties must contribute to ongoing dialogue
The supplier must register sufficient master data in the EPD database for the product to be assigned an EPD number. This is phase 1 of master data registration, and must occur at the latest in U-15 (timeline A1).
Remaining relevant basic data information according to defined information width must be registered in the U-6 (timeline A3.1) after assortment verification). This is phase 2 of master data registration.
Deadline for submission of a control measurement product at EPD Checkpoint / Tradesolution is Friday in U-3 (Timeline A8).
Reference is also made to the process description on www.tradesolution.no.
The top load labelling system
Recommendation for industry and retailers
The system ensures that there is a minimum of product damage and to enable automated and efficient load planning throughout the industry.
It is recommended to the industry to work with its suppliers with the aim of maximizing the quantity of products satisfying the recommendation and that all products are labelled with permission top load.
Part A
Cost-effective transport requires optimal utilization of the factors capacity, weight and volume. The ratio between the average weight of the products and the volume is essentially such that trucks can be fully utilized. However, the reality is that due to different heights on the pallets it is not possible to load trucks and containers in such a way that the volume is utilized. This implies significant and unnecessary additional costs in the supply chain.
Developing a common system to determine the load a pallet can withstand based on the optimal use of packaging consumption will result that the entire industry can achieve better transport utilization and thereby a significant cost reduction, also in a national economic perspective, and contribute to positive environmental impact.
Prerequisites
The system is based on the following assumptions:
Labelling
When using the top load labelling system, STAND recommends that a pallet should be able to withstand its own weight by labelling the pallets with an additional information with maximum top load.
With permissible top load is understood, the weight of the pallet which can be placed on top of a specified pallet should withstand. The pallet should withstand the top load weight without the packaging or the products in the packaging on the underlying pallet being damaged during normal handling and transport.
Note that there is a specific weight to be specified and not a weight class. The use of single weights provides the greatest flexibility and thus the ability to optimize the utilization of the carrier’s loading capacity.
Allowed top load to be labelled is as follows:
Transport label with top load information:
Pallet label with top load information:
PART B
Packaging design
It is recommended that it is how the finished Distribution Unit (DU) / pallet should look like, is the starting point. Then create the design and development of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and Consumer Units (CU) on this. Close collaboration with space management is required for the optimal design of the products in the store shelves.
Strength calculation
It is assumed that the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) strength calculation is normally performed to withstand pressure loads, see PART C.
Practical testing may be the only way to determine the packaging’s ability to withstand pressure loads.
Compression test
For all packaging except for a single corrugated cardboard box where calculation may be sufficient, it is assumed that a compression test of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and Stock Keeping Units (SKU) filled with Consumer Units (CU), regardless of whether Consumer Units (CU) will provide a portion of the load capacity, is assumed.
Norwegian cardboard suppliers have developed their own calculation and test procedures for corrugated cardboard.
For other packaging, manufacturers’ standards, possibly an independent test institute, are used, see PART C.
Safety factor
To reach the maximum permitted top load for a packaging unit and for a pallet of units, consideration must be given to all matters relating to design, materials and applications.
This happens in practice by reducing calculated values by a percentage reduction for different conditions that weaken the packaging.
In addition, a safety factor depends on transport conditions that will compensate for any unforeseen impacts such as the packaging and the pallet may be exposed on its way.
See PART C for more detailed information.
Transportation test
It is recommended that the system in each company contain requirements for transport testing as standard.
In all cases, where there is a new or normative package and for all cases where the consequences of breakage may be particularly large, a transportation test is performed to ensure that the product behaves as provided, even under unfavorable conditions.
A transportation test must therefore be carried out in an environment which will cause the packaging to be subjected to at least the impacts that normal transportation will have.
This is the responsibility of the industry / supplier.
Cost
Savings
PART C
Strength calculation (Example)
Safety factor
There are several factors that affect the choice of safety factor for transport. These can be divided into the following main groups;
The correct safety factor is the responsibility of the product manufacturer.
The security factor must consider conditions that cannot be predicted and thus easily establish the calculations.
Therefore, with the use of a safety factor, it is necessary to assess whether the relevant requirement is within normal transport and handling or not. Determining the safety factor is a relationship between the packaging manufacturer and the product manufacturer, but it is the product manufacturer who is responsible for ensuring that there is no breakage during transport to the consumer.
Sample of security factor
The factor may be set to SF = 3.5. This means that if the packaging is specified to withstand a pressure load of 350kg, it will be approved and marked for 100kg load
under the type of dynamic conditions that occur during normal transportation and handling in Norway.
The packaging
The starting point for the strength of the packaging is the choice of material and construction.
A weak material can be designed to give a high strength construction, and a strong material may be impaired by choice for wrong purposes (incompatible materials), improper processing (stress, fracture or cracking), poor knowledge, etc.
This applies to perforation, tape, pressure that compresses the wave (“flute”) on corrugated cardboard, affixing labels etc.
In addition, especially moisture will weaken the packaging and thereby the strength significantly.
Reduction of strength due to these conditions will normally be part of the work performed by the packaging supplier as part of the development work.
Pallet pattern
There are in principle two different ways to stack products on a pallet (pallet patterns); bond stacking pattern and column stacking pattern.
Bond stacking means that the units on each layer are different than the ones above and under, thus locking each other to a greater or lesser extent, but it reduces the compressive strength by approx. 40 %.
Column stacking means stacking packages on top of each other without overlapping with other packages. This form of stacking gives maximum strength in terms of pressure load due to that the corners are bigger breach stiffness than the sides, but the stack gives poor stability without additional use of stretch film, strap, ribbon or similar.
Case fill rate
Case fill rate expresses the ratio of volume of product (measured in volume) to the volume of packaging.
The packaging system consists of Consumer Unit (CU) and Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
Example of case fill rate measurement for a bottle (Consumer Unit (CU)):
Unnecessary volume in the packaging of products is cost-driving and an impact on the environment throughout the value chain.
Therefore, all products must be optimized so that the degree of case fill rate and circulation ensures:
This animation shows how case fill rates are calculated for different products
More about the case fill rate, and more examples of how the case fill rate is calculated, can be found on the Tradesolution website, www.tradesolution.no.
This sub process consists of points (A3-A5 in timeline):
The process describes the flow of information and the physical flow of the product.
This is illustrated in a timeline.
The standard differs on different types of pallets depending on the content.
Only Standard pallet and Promotional Unit can provide a clear labelling of product information that applies to the entire pallet.
Standard pallet
A Distribution Unit (DU) containing the same product (same GTIN) with fixed count of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and where labelling of unique product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) is possible.
It is recommended that a Standard pallet only contain Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with the same batch / lot number and shelf life date.
There are two different types of Standard pallet:
Standard pallet – Low is used for low-frequency products and for products with short shelf life.
A product can only be used on one type of Standard pallet, either 120 cm height or 60 cm height.
Standard pallet with height 120 cm
Standard pallet with height 60 cm (Standard pallet – Low)
Standard pallet shall be labelled with product and transport information.
Since product information and transportation information are usually known at different times, the practical solution is to label the device with two different labels:
Product information on the GS1 product label for Standard pallet
SSCC (License Plate)
Must be labelled with GS1-128 AI 00 on the GS1 Product label on each Standard pallet in human readable text and in the bar code. The SSCC provides a unique identification of each Distribution Unit (DU). Because of traceability a SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
The bar code containing the SSCC should be the lowest bar code on the label. It is recommended to have a bar code containing only the SSCC and no other AI’s.
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Standard pallet must be labelled with GTIN. This can be done in the following ways:
Product name
The product’s name must be written in human readable text on the Distribution Unit’s (DU) product label. Product name must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, and product description. The product description labelled on the Distributions Unit (DU) must correspond to the text in the Despatch Advice and the invoice.
Batch / lot number.
GS1-128 AI 10 is generated by the manufacturer and used to track the product back to specific production series.
If all Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the pallet have the same batch / lot number, this is indicated on the label in human readable text and bar code. If the pallet contains Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with different batch / lot numbers, batch / lot number is omitted on the label. However, all unique batch / lot numbers must be stated in the electronic Despatch Advice.
Shelf life information
GS1-128 AI 15 should be labelled on all Distribution Units (DU) that contain Consumer Unit (CU) with “Best before date” printed on them.
Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking.
Net weight (in grams)
GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure products. Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Gross weight (in whole kg)
Shall be labelled in human readable text on each Distribution Unit (DU). Gross weight means weight of products, packaging and pallet (load carrier).
Max. top load (in whole kg)
Must be labelled in human readable text.
Distribution Units (DU) that can not be stacked (in transport or storing) are marked with: Cannot be stacked (Kan ikke stables).
Temperature requirements
shall be labelled in human readable text if the product has a temperature requirement.
Product labelling on Standard pallet
Overview of product information that shall or may be labelled on Standard pallet: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
SSCC (License Plate)1) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
GTIN for the Distribution Unit (DU)2) | Can be labelled | Can be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
GTIN for the contained Stock Keeping Units (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 02 | n2 + n14 |
Count of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the DU | Must be marked except when DU is defined as an SKU | Must be marked except when DU is defined as an SKU | 37 | n2 + n..8 |
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number3) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Best before date4) | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | 15 | n2 + n6 |
Net weight | Must be labelled for products of variable measure | Must be labelled for products of variable measure | 3103 | n4 + n6 |
Gross weight | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Max. top load | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled if the product has temperature requirements | Not labelled | ||
1) SSCC shall be indicated on the product label but permitted on both labels provided that the same number is used. 2) Can be used in a case for a transitional period. 3) If Batch / Lot No. is omitted on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), or it is different Batch / Lot No. on the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) this should not be labelled on the Distribution Unit (DU). 4) Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking. |
Example on the GS1 product label for Standard pallet
Promotional Unit
A Unit defined as a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) containing a fixed number of Consumer Unit (CU), intended for display in stores.
Promotional Unit can be 1/1 pallet, 1/2 pallet or 1/3 pallet.
Each Promotional Unit has its own load carrier.
Promotional Unit consisting of 1/2 pallet or 1/3 pallet are placed on a slave pallet. This constitutes a transport unit.
If slave pallet is omitted, this must be agreed bilaterally. For example, for 1/2 pallets with good stability, they can be tied together and exclude the slave pallet. This allows for better use of the pallet by increasing the Promotional Unit, thus allowing more items on the pallet.
Promotional Units are labelled with two levels of SSCC:
Labelling of Promotional Units provides increased traceability in the value chain
Product information on the GS1 product label for Promotional Unit
SSCC (License Plate)
Must be labelled with GS1-128 AI 00 on the GS1 Product label on each Promotional Unit in human readable text and in the bar code. The SSCC provides a unique identification of each Distribution Unit (DU). Because of traceability a SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
The bar code containing the SSCC should be the lowest bar code on the label. It is recommended to have a bar code containing only the SSCC and no other AI’s.
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Promotional Unit must be labelled with GTIN. This can be done in the following ways:
Product name
The product’s name must be written in human readable text on the Distribution Unit’s (DU) product label. Product name must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, and product description. The product description labelled on the Distributions Unit (DU) must correspond to the text in the Despatch Advice and the invoice.
Batch / lot number
GS1-128 AI 10 is generated by the manufacturer and used to track the product back to specific production series.
If all Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the Distribution Unit (DU) have the same batch / lot number, this is indicated on the label in plain text and bar code. If the Distribution Unit (DU) contains Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with different batch / lot numbers, batch / lot number is omitted on the label. However, all unique batch / lot numbers must be stated in the electronic Despatch Advice.
Shelf life information
GS1-128 AI 15 should be labelled on all Distribution Units (DU) that contain Consumer Unit (CU) with “Best before date” printed on them.
Consumer Unit (CU). Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking.
Net weight (in grams)
GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU). Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Gross weight (in whole kg)
shall be labelled in human readable text on each Distribution Unit (DU). Gross weight means weight of products, packaging and pallet (load carrier).
Max. top load (in whole kg)
must be labelled in human readable text.
Distribution Units (DU) that can not be stacked (in transport or storing) are marked with: Cannot be stacked.
Temperature requirements
shall be labelled in human readable text if the product has a temperature requirement.
Product labelling on Promotional Unit
Overview of labelling of product information that may or may not be labelled on Promotional Unit: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
SSCC (License Plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
GTIN for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number1) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Best before date2) | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | 15 | n2 + n6 |
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled if the product has temperature requirements | Not labelled | ||
Supplier’s item number | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
1) If Batch / Lot No. is omitted on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), or it is different Batch / Lot No. on the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) this should not be labelled on the Distribution Unit (DU). 2) Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking. |
Example of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label with SSCC for Promotional Unit
Units where product information can not be entered on their own label
Mixed pallet
Two variants of Mixed pallets are described; with and without intermediate pallet.
On Mixed pallet it is not possible to enter product information on its own label.
Mixed pallet without intermediate pallet:
Pallet consisting of several different products.
Mixed pallet with intermediate pallet:
Pallet consisting of several different products, where each product is stacked in one or more layers, and where each different product is separated by an intermediate pallet.
The choice of type of mixed pallet depends, among other things, on handling costs, transport / environmental costs and storage technology and must be agreed bilaterally between the parties.
Packaging and stability of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be considered when choosing type of a Mixed pallet.
If intermediate pallet(s) are used, it shall always be ordered the amount of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) to complete a layer.
Mixed pallet (both with and without intermediate pallet) is labelled with Standard shipping label for Norwegian grocery sector.
Customer packed pallet
When a supplier assembles products for delivery to the final recipient, the products are packaged and labelled with SSCC at two packaging levels.
Customer packed units are labelled for delivery to the end-user and the Distribution Unit (DU) is labelled for delivery to the transit warehouse.
On Customer packed units it is not possible to enter product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) label.
A customer-packed pallet can be Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers, Customer packed unit – single route, multiple customers, or Customer packed unit – single customer.
This Customer packed units does not need to have its own load carrier and is being loaded on a standardized transport unit (for example, an EUR pallet).
Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers and Customer packed unit – single route, multiple customer is stacked in columns per. end receiver.
Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers is split after products receipt in the transit warehouse, and the individual Customer packed unit is forwarded to the final recipient. A prerequisite is that all Customer packed units located on one Distribution Unit (DU) are destined for the same transit warehouse.
Type of bar code symbol
When labelling with bar code on Stock Keeping Units (SKU) GS1-128 bar code shall be used.
Identical information
Same information (GS1-128 AI) should only occur once per label.
Size and design of labels
Since the shape and size of the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is highly varied, size and design of the label may also vary.
Quality of labels
It is a prerequisite that the labels are readable throughout the value chain for the entire life span of the unit. Therefore, the quality of GS1-128 bar codes must minimum fulfill print quality with “Grade C” according to standard ISO / IEC 15416.
To achieve “Grade C” when reading, “Grade B” or better is recommended at printing.
Quality of labels and bar codes can be verified at GS1 Norway.
Placement of labels on Stock Keeping Units (SKU)
It is recommended that the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is labelled on two sides.
If labelling can only be done on one side, the label on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be on the same side as one of labels on the pallet (consistent orientation).
By column stacking the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label will be oriented towards one pallet label (either on the short or long side of the pallet).
By bond stacking (like bricks) the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label could be oriented towards the two labels of the pallet. That is, both on the short and the long side of the pallet.
Bar codes
The following recommendations apply to GS1-128 bar code symbols:
Placement of bar code symbols on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Placement of bar code symbols on Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with height less than 50 mm
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
Traceability using pallet labelling and EDI Despatch Advice
The recommended traceability method involves labelling load carriers with GS1 labelling system combined with EDI Despatch Advice (Advance Shipping Notice(ASN)).
For products distributed through the retailer’s distribution warehouses, the industry’s unified guidelines for the identification and Distribution Units (DU) are based on GS1 standards.
To conduct traceability, each actor in the value chain must have a system that can store and process Distribution Units (DU) or logistic units with unique identifiers.
The importance of SSCC as the primary tracking key for deliveries
SSCC is the most important tracking key in the retail value chain. For each pallet identified and marked with SSCC, all products that are on the pallet are linked with full tracking information (GTIN, batch / lot and shelf life). This information is sent to the buyer in an EDI Despatch Advice.
A prerequisite for the tracking information to remain intact is that an SSCC is not reused.
Reusing a SSCC can result in a pallet being stopped at the Goods Reception by the recipient’s IT system, anticipating that the pallet has been received earlier. The recipient must then issue a new SSCC for the pallet, mark it and link the contents of the pallet to the new SSCC.
Since the pallet now has a new SSCC, it can no longer be used as a mutual tracking key in the retail value chain. In case of an incident with a possible recall / withdrawal of products, this could be critical.
STAND has therefore decided the following:
“For trading in Norway, it is a requirement that SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years. This is rooted in the Norwegian Food Safety Law, requiering a minimum traceability of 5 years. This also includes products that are outside the scope of the Norwegian Food Safety Law”.
Traceability at and from sender
Each packaging level (Consumer Units (CU), Stock Keeping Units (SKU), Distribution Units (DU)) has an assigned GTIN and must include a bar code on the label.
On Consumer Unit (CU), GTIN should preferably be labelled with the EAN-13 bar code symbol.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) on the Distribution Unit (DU) must be labelled with an approved bar code symbology and linked to the Distribution Unit’s (DU) unique identification.
Each pallet must be labelled with one GS1-128 bar code pallet label. The label contains a unique identifier (SSCC) which enables a link between the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) on the pallet and the batch / lot number stored in the sender’s IT systems.
If the pallet is split or changed (for example, to one Mixed pallet or Promotional Unit, it shall be identified with a new GS1-128 label and SSCC. Mixed pallets are not labelled with product information.
The product information is attached to the pallet’s SSCC by scanning each Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) when the Distribution Unit (DU) is being assembled.
Once the sender has created the connection between the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU and the Distribution Unit (DU) and secured this, the information can be used to make an EDI Despatch Advice.
The EDI Despatch Advice is then sent from the sender to the recipient of the products. The parties are identified with GLN. This provides a clear and secure identification of the parties and is central to traceability. The Despatch Advice contains all relevant product information (GTIN, batch / lot and shelf life) about the shipment, and that it ties it to each Distribution Unit (DU) using SSCC.
For shipment, the supplier scans all outgoing Distribution Units (DU) and thus has a unified link between the individual product, its associated batches and which customer receives the product. This also enables effective control of the sending of correct products to customers.
Sender sends EDI Despatch Advice to recipient at agreed time.
Traceability at receiver
When the products arrive at the recipient, each pallet will be scanned.
All Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU) information is received in the EDI Despatch Advice. Using the EDI Despatch Advice, the tracking information is taken care of and significantly simplifies the products receipt.
The link to the product information occurs when the recipient scans the SSCC on each Distribution Unit (DU). Here, the recipient connects information about the products (GTIN, batch and shelf life information, against the sender (GLN).
For a Standard pallet all relevant information can be scanned from the Distribution Unit (DU) labels. This ensures that correct products are received at the same time as traceability information can be linked to the individual supplier. This simplifies and ensures the sharing of proper traceability information.
Mixed pallets must be split into the warehouse, and through IT support ensure that accurate and statutory traceability information is safeguarded and connected correctly.
The buyer shall make a complaint about errors or defects in the products within a reasonable time after the error or defect is discovered or should have been discovered.
Seller who claims that the complaint deadline has been exceeded must do so immediately after the complaint has been received.
The buyer may require replacement, redeployment, price reduction, etc. pursuant to the provisions of the applicable law (Kjøpsloven).
All errors and defects must be based on the things that the seller is responsible for.
The legislation requires that each company must have systems to document which products are purchased from each supplier and which customer has purchased the company’s finished products.
This also includes raw materials and other input that are covered by the legislation.
There is no requirement in the legislation for which type of systems to be used for this.
Businesses can practice more comprehensive tracking systems than the minimum regulatory requirements require, but this is either based on self-imposed requirements or agreements with, and orders from the contracting parties.
Tracking means being able to follow the physical flow of goods. This is often referred to as chain traceability, and assumes that all parties meet the requirements and follow the guidelines for tracking.
Tracking takes into account the legal requirements for all parties to be able to trace their products one step forward and one step back in the value chain.
Tracking one step forward:
This means to the address the products are delivered to.
An invoice system containing information about item number / item name, customer number / customer name and invoice date is sufficient to be able to trace one step forward in the value chain.
If the company is using batch/lot numbers for their products, this should be included in the invoice, despatch advice and the like, or linked directly to the company’s own systems.
Tracking one step backward:
This means the address from which the products are delivered.
The company must keep a log of received products describing which products were purchased from whom and in which quantitiy, and date.
If the addresses for where products are delivered from or delivered to are not in accordance with the legal ownership of the products and the invoice process, this should be agreed separately between the parties.
Legislative anchoring of the guidelines
The guidelines are among others based on Norwegian or European regulations on food safety and traceability:
Each party has an obligation to familiarize themselves with the regulations that apply to the products your business sells or are involved in.
The legislation does not impose requirements on how tracking should be performed, and what systems in which tracking information should be recorded. Manual systems may be sufficient as long as the requirements for tracking and tracking information are met.
Routines
The guidelines cover two procedures
Prepare crisis procedures
This is included:
Overview of the messages to be exchanged for the various forms of distribution, with deadlines.
Implementation of EDI in the retail trade
Introduction to implementation of EDI in the retail trade where STAND’s guidelines are to be used.
Before an exchange of EDI can take place, an EDI exchange agreement must be established.
This specifies all relevant information, such as:
In addition, the EDI exchange agreement shall state all bilateral agreements relating to EDI Interaction.
Bilateral agreements shall be established in all areas where deviations from other guidelines in STAND, which involve EDI, arise. This may be:
Some important clarifications
Valid formats of messages
STAND supports two main formats;
In addition, some customers accept other formats, but description of these is not part of the STAND guidelines.
The most used of other formats are
Both are XML-based
Exchange methods
There are different ways to exchange EDI messages. This is not regulated in STAND, but is agreed between the parties. The most relevant methods of exchange are:
Introduction to technical documentation EDI
In the following, conditions are described which, regardless of the format in which EDI messages are exchanged, are common and must be assessed/taken into account when implementing EDI.
The target group for the documentation is technical personnel who will implement EDI in the IT solutions at the customer or supplier.
However, it is highly recommended that the documentation is be reviewed together with the customer / supplier’s business department, as describe in detail what needs to be considered for expected interaction to take place.
Technical documentation describes message flow and interaction related thereto for all processes where EDI is used, and deals with the messages:
As messages and interaction may vary for each type of distribution, the documentation is divided into three parts, one for each of the distribution forms:
The guidelines emphasize that the exchange of messages and interaction must take place according to simple and clear principles that also make control and follow-up as simple as possible.
Despite this, bilateral agreements must be concluded in several areas. These are described for each form of distribution and process in subsequent documentation.
Bilateral agreements must be documented in the EDI exchange agreement.
Areas where bilateral agreements can be established is:
Areas where bilateral agreements can be established is:
Areas where bilateral agreements can be established is:
Areas where bilateral agreements can be established is:
Areas where bilateral agreements can be established is:
Areas where bilateral agreements can be established is:
Areas where bilateral agreements can be established is:
Areas where bilateral agreements can be established is:
Areas where bilateral agreements can be established is:
Special conditions at Crossdock
Replacement product (alternative product)
Use of replacement products must be agreed bilaterally. Replacement products can be used in connection with customer packed deliveries.
The principle is that original product ordered is replaced by alternate product from supplier. The supplier and the customer have agreed in advance which products are to be replaced. Order confirmation to describe the deviation between which product is ordered and which is delivered will not be used in this case.
It may occur that one product may be replaced with several replacement products.
Additional product lines
Use of additional products must be agreed bilaterally. Additional product lines can be used for customer packed deliveries.
The principle is that additional product lines are used if the products is not ordered in the original order but is ordered in retrospect (for example, by phone). The supplier and the customer have agreed in advance which products are to be replaced. Order Confirmation is not used in this case.
Customer packed deliveries from supplier
Identification of end customer / end receiver
In case of customer packed deliveries from the supplier, the main rule is that the end receiver is identified with GLN in the order notice. In special situations where the supplier has no access to GLN, the customer may send with the end receiver’s name and address information.
Handling Instructions
In case of customer packed deliveries from the supplier, the customers need to be informed about detailed transport information / handling instructions for Crossdocking on transit storage. This type of information is exchanged in the order notice.
Handling instructions sent from customer to supplier are specified as a structured free text field.
Indication of SSCC
Each unit of customer packed deliveries must be labelled with SSCC. Information about the individual devices and the connection to the SSCC is sent in the Despatch Advice.
Parties
At Crossdock, the buyer or product recipient shall identify the Crossdocking terminal. The end receiver shall then identify the recipient, which may be a warehouse or a store.
Areas where bilateral agreements can be established is:
Areas where bilateral agreements can be established is:
Areas where bilateral agreements can be established is:
Placement of labels on pallet
Two types of labels shall be used; label for product information and label for transport information.
Identical information
Same information (GS1-128 AI) shall only appear once on the product and transport label.
This means in practice that the same information can not be repeated on the same label or that the same information may appear on multiple labels on the device (pallet).
The exception is SSCC which is allowed on both labels if it is an identical number used.
Size and design of the labels
The following recommendation applies:
Recommended formats are:
Quality of labels
Content of the Standard shipping label for the Norwegian grocery sector.
Overview of labelling of Standard shipping label: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
Sender’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Recipient’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Name, address, etc. for the Crossdocking terminal | Must be labelled when the delivery is via the Crossdocking terminal | Not labelled | ||
Buyer’s reference | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Gross weight | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Max. Top load1) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
SSCC (License Plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
1) Max Top load is omitted for Mixed pallet. |
Example of Standard shipping label for the grocery industry
Transport label for Standard pallet
Standard pallet is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry
A GS1 product label on a Standard pallet requires labeling of SSCC, gross weight, top load weight and temperature requirements.
This information can therefore be omitted from Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
If both product label and transport label are used, SSCC can be labelled on both labels provided that the identical number is used.
Transport label for Promotional Unit
The Distribution Unit (DU) containing one or more Promotional Units is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
The Distribution Unit (DU) is identified and labelled with its own SSCC
If the Promotional Unit a 1/1 pallet, the same labelling of transport label as for Standard pallet is used.
Transport label for Mixed pallet
Mixed pallet (both with and without interlayer pallet) is labelled with Standard shipping label for the Norwegian grocery industry.
If the Mixed pallet is not stackable, information on Top load is omitted.
Transport label for Customer packed pallets
The Customer packed pallet is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
Note in particular:
Recipient’s name, address, etc.
As recipient transit warehouse is given and transit address is given as delivery address. The pallet must be labelled with the transit warehouse’s name, street address, postal code and postal address in human readable text.
Name, address, etc. for the distribution warehouse.
The via-field the distribution warehouse is given. The pallet must be labelled with the distributions warehouse’s name, street address, postal code and postal address in human readable text.
Transport label for Customer packed units
Transport Information.
On this label, a separate field has been created for transport information. This is information that the buyer sends to the supplier in his order and which the supplier must put on the Customer packed unit’s transport label.
Format and content of transport information is agreed between the parties.
Content in transport label for customer packed unit
Transport label for customer packed unit: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
Sender’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
End recipients’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Name, address, etc. for the transit warehouse1) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Transport information2) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Buyer’s reference3) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Gross weight4) | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
SSCC Code (licence plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
1) Transit Warehouse where the pallet is split/cross-docked, is stated in the VIA-field | ||||
2) Transport information is agreed between the parties | ||||
3) Example The Customers Ordering Number | ||||
4) Gross weight is the sum of weight of the products, packaging materials and pallet (load carrier) |
Example of shipping label for Customer packed unit
Product information on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), with example of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label
Only product information should be labelled on a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
What information to be labelled depends on the type of product.
Intermediate Cartons shall be labelled as Stock Keeping Units (SKU)
Possible product information which SHALL or CAN be labelled on a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Includes GTIN-8 (8 digits), GTIN-12 (12 digits), GTIN-13 (13 digits) and GTIN-14 (14 digits).
All Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must have their own GTIN.
– For variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU), GTIN-14 with a leading digit 9 should be used.
– For other products, GTIN-13 is recommended.
Name of brand owner
– shall be shown in plain text either on the label or on the packaging.
Product name
– Must be written in plain text on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) product label.
– Must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, – and product description.
– The product description labelled on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be identical to the text in the Despatch Advice and Invoice.
-Product description should also contain a package description: for example, Coffee 12 x 500gr.
Batch / lot number
– A number generated by the manufacturer, used to achieve full traceability of product lot/batches in the value chain
– GS1-128 AI 10 must be used.
Shelf life information (“Best before” date, alternatively “Expiry date”)
– Must be labelled on all Stock Keeping Units which has shelf life printed on the Consumer Unit (CU)
GS1-128 AI 15 shall be used for «Best before date”
GS1-128 AI 17 shall be used for «Expiry date»
Net weight
– GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU).
– Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Supplier’s item number
– can be labelled in plain text.
Table showing what SHALL or CAN be labelled:
Overview of product information that shall or may be labelled on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU): | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
GTIN for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
Name of brand owner | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Shelf life | Must be labelled if shelf life is marekd on the Consumer Unit (CU) |
Must be labelled if shelf life is marekd on the Consumer Unit (CU) |
15, alternatively 17 |
n2 + n6
|
Net weight | Must be labelled for products with variable measures |
Must be labelled for products with variable measures |
310x | n4 + n6
|
Supplier’s item no. | Can be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Example of GS1 Product label for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), for a product with “Best before” date and a fixed weight:
Example of GS1 Product label for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), for a product with “Expiry date” and variable measures:
Suppliers are encouraged to work closely with packaging suppliers and customers in developing new products.
Suppliers are encouraged to work closely with suppliers of packaging and customers in the process of developing new products.
The grocery industry is heavily packaging intensive. Increasing demands and expectations from authorities and consumers for reduction in use of virgin fossil materials and replacing plastic, whenever possible, will be highly focused. “Design for recycling” will be crucial to meet future regulations, expectations, environmental requirements and recycling goals.
Reduction of food waste will have increased focus to meet reduction targets agreed by the trade and the Norwegian authorities.
The grocery value chain in Norway has for many years exercised responsibility by active ownership in the material return shemes for packaginxg Grønt Punkt Norge and by funding the company Matvett to prevent food waste. These organizations are available to support you introducing more sustainable products.
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
Suppliers are encouraged to work closely with packaging suppliers and customers in developing new products.
Suppliers are encouraged to work closely with suppliers of packaging and customers in the process of developing new products.
The grocery industry is heavily packaging intensive. Increasing demands and expectations from authorities and consumers for reduction in use of virgin fossil materials and replacing plastic, whenever possible, will be highly focused. “Design for recycling” will be crucial to meet future regulations, expectations, environmental requirements and recycling goals.
Reduction of food waste will have increased focus to meet reduction targets agreed by the trade and the Norwegian authorities.
The grocery value chain in Norway has for many years exercised responsibility by active ownership in the material return shemes for packaginxg Grønt Punkt Norge and by funding the company Matvett to prevent food waste. These organizations are available to support you introducing more sustainable products.
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
Endringslogg
The grocery industry has a common goal of being able to:
when products are being developed/changed.
To achieve this, it is crucial to standardize and optimize packaging on the product at all packaging levels – Consumer Unit (CU), Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU).
STAND has therefore prepared a standard for this, which applies to all packaging levels.
Audience for the standard is managers and everyone who works with product development, assortment and logistics in the value chain.
By complying with the standard, processes in the value chain are optimized and gains can be extracted in a number of areas such as:
Warehouse
Outbound transport
Inbound transport
Shop
Consumer
In addition, optimization of packaging through compliance with the standard will reduce environmental impact at all stages in the value chain, as part of the industry agreement with the authorities.
The packaging must be:
Easy to sort
In order for the packaging to be able to be recycled, it is important that it is sorted correctly by the end user and thus enters the correct recycling stream. There are a number of steps you can take when designing the packaging, which increase the likelihood that it will be sorted correctly. This information is summarized at https://www.grontpunkt.no/design-for-kildesortering
Recyclable
In order for the packaging to be material-recycled and become new raw material that can be used to make new products, it is important that this is taken into account in the packaging design and material selection. To find out how recyclable the packaging is and what steps can be taken to improve this, you can enter the packaging in https://kalkulator.grontpunkt.no
In monomaterial if possible
The easiest way to make it more intuitive for the end user to sort the packaging correctly, and to make it easier to recycle the packaging, is to ensure that the packaging only consists of one material.
From recycled material if possible
Most packaging is recycled, but there is too little demand for recycled material. By using recycled material when developing new packaging, you ensure that the circular material flows work and thus both reduce the need for virgin raw material and the environmental burdens these entail.
Important notice
All products must follow the GS1 Allocation rules. (chapter 2.4). These are international rules and are mainly based on the fact that a change of over 20% to a physical dimension, on any axis, or gross weight, requires assignment of a new GTIN.
In addition, the following applies to Norway:
Exception from the standard
Under special conditions, exceptions from industry standards and guidelines may be relevant.
Exceptions must be agreed separately between the parties concerned and shall be described in Checklist for optimization of Consumer Unit (CU), Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU).
The check list can be downloaded as a separate document.
Consumer Unit (CU) is the unit the consumer purchases in store.
Consumer Unit (CU) must be designed to optimize use of shop shelves and other furnishings. In addition, the information on the Consumer Unit (CU) should be visible even when the package is on a tray on the shelf.
Consumer Unit (CU) should be easy to open and to use.
Consumer Unit (CU) should be, included Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU) adapted to the modular system, see Modular system
Unnecessary volume not containing the product itself in the packaging should be limited to what is necessary to protect the product. If necessary, secure against shrinkage (small, valuable Consumer Units (CU)).
Quantity (packing content) in Consumer Unit (CU) is determined by manufacturer, preferably in dialogue with distributor / retail chain.
Case fill rate shall be calculated. This is described in Case fill rate
On new products, it is expected that the case fill rate is higher than the average of the product group to which it belongs.
Measurement of the case fill rate related to the product launch windows was carried out by DMF until 2018. When switching to a new product classification system, historical data could not be compared, as the timeline and product groupings from 2014 were changed.
Efforts to increase the case fill rate in the grocery industry are important from both an environmental and efficiency perspective.
In collaboration with the industry, Tradesolution has developed some new reports for measuring the case fill rate in the grocery industry. Suppliers and retailer chains that have access to the EPD base can see the case fill rate for the products they have access to directly in the database. Here you can see the actual case fill rate on basic product (BASIS-level) and calculated case fill rate for the packaging levels above.
Log in her and feel free to contact the EPD base helpdesk at epd@tradesolution.no if you have further questions.
Background
The need for information both in trade and to the consumer is constantly increasing. Today’s solution using the EAN-13 barcode does not provide opportunities for additional machine-readable information. The need for more information has led to products that have more than one bar code applied to Consumer Units, which creates challenges both at the checkout point (POS) and in the value chain. Often this is a QR code with a link to a website where the consumer can find more information.
In parallel with the need for more communication with consumers, a need is emerging at the retail level to gain more control over the traceability and expiry date of the products, to ensure safe food and reduce food waste. This is happening in most countries in the world. In Norway, GS1 Norway, together with Matvett, established a working group consisting of representatives from brand suppliers, grocery chains, system suppliers and other stakeholders to discuss these issues. These guidelines are a result of this work and have now been included as part of STAND’s framework for the Norwegian grocery industry.
Purpose of the use of 2D barcodes in Norwegian grocery
Although 2D barcodes are not the only solution to the challenges, this is the data carrier of the future, where the need for information is greater than just identifying a product with GTIN. 2D barcodes take up less space, can contain more information about the product, are a tool for reducing food waste and increase food security, are more flexible, and can be read by mobile phones. This provides an opportunity for increased consumer contact. In addition, 2D barcodes can solve all needs for information exchange throughout the supply chain, including being able to link to websites.
Different types of 2D barcodes
There are many different 2D barcodes, but only some of them can be used in connection with the GS1 standards, which are the standards used by the Norwegian grocery industry. The different 2D barcodes are also used for different purposes. This is regulated in GS1’s regulations, General Specifications. The difference between the different 2D barcodes helps to determine what they can be used for.
QR Code
The QR Code barcode is in the GS1 system defined to be used only with GS1 Digital Link URI syntax. In practice, this means that this should only be used for communication with the consumer via a URL that links to a website with more information that the consumer can read with his mobile phone. QR Code has grown to become the preferred barcode for consumer communication and most mobile phones today are able to read this with the built-in camera app in the phone. This means that the threshold for reading QR Code is low among consumers, and it is less need for training and communication to put functionality related to QR Code into production. Here you can find more information about QR codes.
GS1 Datamatrix
GS1 Datamatrix is a variant of Datamatrix that uses GS1 Element String syntax. This is the use of AI (Application Identifier) structure. This is a way of structuring the information in the barcode so that everyone who reads the barcode understands the content in the same way regardless of the order in which the information is printed and how much information is in the barcode. According to GS1 General Specifications, GS1 Datamatrix is only permitted for use on Consumer units with variable measure and prescription medicines. However, it is permitted to use it in limited pilots, for test purposes and in closed value chains under controlled conditions. The advantage of GS1 Datamatrix is that it has high compression and error correction. It can be printed both square and rectangular so that it can fit where there is not enough height, but enough width to get the information needed without compromising on size and thus readability. However, the rectangular version has a limit on the amount of data that can be used. GS1 Datamatrix is the only permitted barcode on prescription drugs. Here you can find more information about GS1 Datamatrix.
Content in barcode
A minimum requirement for information attributes has been defined for POS purposes.
This is:
It is possible to use other Application Identifiers for internal and/or external needs, but this is then up to each individual actor to use.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is the unit the retailer buys.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) occurs in various forms, such as carton, reusable box / pallet box, intermediate carton and such.
The most important task of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is to secure Consumer Units (CU) from the time of manufacturing until it is finished exposed in a shop shelf.
The number of Consumer Units (CU) in a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is determined by the manufacturer, preferably in dialogue with the distributor / retail chain.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be adapted to the modular system, see Modular system
for picking and grouping of products can be done as efficient as possible.
Case fill rate shall be calculated. This is described in Case fill rate
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be designed to withstand the strain required in the value chain.
Automatic warehouses require that Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must be packed in a way that it can be lifted, stacked, clamped and handled with different mechanized devices, see Automated warehouse at distributor – greater understanding of the depalletization process.
Design requirements and packaging
When designing a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), it must be based on the modular system.
This means that the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should not be less than 100 x 150 mm and not more than 400 x 600 mm.
Example of best practices
Modular Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is not adapted to the modular system.
The size of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must consider the size of the shelf space for the current product group.
The short side of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should be front where appropriate.
There must be a simple and clear opening guide, preferably with illustration.
The packaging must be opened without using a knife.
When the Consumer Units (CU) is exposed in the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), the least possible of the Stock Keeping Unit’s (SKU) packaging should be visible when exposed in the store shelf.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must not weigh more than 15 kg.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be in recyclable cardboard or plastic.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Lid / plastic film is missing, which may cause Consumer Unit (CU) to fall out during internal transport.
Plastic boxes – all variants – must be considered to work in automated warehouse handling.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be form stable.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is form stable.
Example of best practices
Form stable Stock Keeping Units (SKU) that embraces close to its content and is strong enough to not deform.
Resists load on inbound transport (2 pallets in height), as well as handling through the value chain.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Not form stable. Do not resist strain on inbound transport (2 pallets in height), as well as handling through the value chain.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) that is only wrapped in plastic foil must have a tray / trough below.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) on tray / trough with plastic wrap.
Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must have straight sides.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with straight sides.
Glue quality and amount of glue on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be such that glued surfaces do not loosen.
Example of best practices
Glue quality and amount of glue is such that glued surfaces do not loosen.
Constructed example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Too little glue / too few glue points are included that flap gaps with subsequent stops in automatic warehouse systems.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should be stackable and “ears” should only be used where it is necessary for stability.
Should “ears” be used, these should not exceed 5mm and should not be used in conjunction with intermediate pallet sheets.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should not have loose lid.
The lid must be attached to the tray / trough in such a way that it does not loosen during handling. It is recommended to use glue points or a locking mechanism.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must have a center of gravity relative to the base that allows it to be handled on conveyor belts.
The height / width ratio should be below 1.7 to ensure that the products do not fall under internal transport in an automatic warehouse.
Example of best practices
The ratio height / width is below 1.7.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
The height / width ratio is over 1.7, which means that the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) can fall during internal transport.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) exposure front should not be less than 30 mm, regardless of the chosen solution.
The information on the Consumer Unit (CU) must be visible.
Packaging capacity
During the design of the product and packaging it must be considered that the outer dimensions of the finished Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), tray and otherwise, under the load of the above-mentioned product packaging, due to bulging, is within the margin. In practice, this can be from 0.5 to 1.0 cm.
Optimal transport requires the use of load capacity of the transport systems (weight and height).
Generally, the packaging should be able to carry a similar pallet (2 identical pallets) without any breakage or clamping damage during transport and storage.
Exceptions from this must be specified and labelled on the (Distribution Unit (DU).
Method of calculation of carrying capacity is described in Top load labelling system.
The packaging shall be able to withstand shipping with other products for shipping to the store in a rational way.
In order to achieve the industry’s common goal of efficient flow of products, reduced negative environmental impact, promoted sales and reduced losses, it is important to focus on:
Especially for reusable boxes / pallet boxes
Basically, Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is desired in cardboard, or in combination with plastic.
Reusable boxes are an alternative to Stock Keeping Units (SKU) in corrugated paper but must be agreed bilaterally.
Particularly for Intermediate cartons
The use of Intermediate cartons should be kept as low as possible and must be agreed bilaterally.
Intermediate cartons are accepted in cases where the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) solution is not possible because the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) does not meet the requirements for strength, stability or size and where the use of intermediate pallet sheet on pallet is not possible.
The intermediate carton must be labelled so that it clearly differs from the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and shall not weigh more than 15 kg.
The Distribution Unit (DU) is the unit the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is stacked on / packed in for transport to distributor.
Design of a Standard pallet (Standard pallet and Standard pallet – Low)
A Standard pallet must contain the same product (same GTIN) with a fixed number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU), in a fixed pallet pattern, with equal number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU)on each layer, and where labelling of unique product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) is possible.
The pallet structure shall contain as little excess volume of “air” as possible.
Standard pallet
Maximum pallet height must be 1200 mm incl. pallet. All pallets with total height above standard 1200mm with maximum height of 1250 mm to be agreed bilaterally between supplier and their customers.
Tolerance limit for existing products is 1249 mm.
Standard pallet – Low
Maximum pallet height shall be 600 mm incl. pallet.
Standard pallet – Low is used for low-frequency products and for products with short shelf life.
Principles for the construction of a palletpattern, central in calculation of top load weight, ref Top load labelling system.
When creating a pallet pattern, the following applies:
Types of pallet pattern
When constructing Distribution Units (DU), the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be placed in accordance with a given pallet pattern. These are referred to as bond stacking and column stacking. Pallets can also be built as a combination of bond stacking and column stacking.
Bond Stacking
Bond Stacking means that the units on every other layer are different, thus locking each other to a greater or lesser extent, but it reduces the compressive strength by approx. 40%.
Example of good pallet utilization and stacking with bond stacking, for good stability.
Column Stacking
Column stacking means stacking packages on top of each other without overlapping with other packages. This form of stacking gives maximum strength in terms of pressure load due to that the corners have better roll stiffness than the sides, but the stack gives poor stability without additional use of shrink wrap, strap, ribbon or similar.
Example of column stacking in the lower pallet layers, and bond stacking on the top layer. Combining the different stacking methods achieves good stack strength on the lower layers while the pallet is locked on top.
This is often a good alternative to intermediate pallet sheets.
Use of plastic to secure the pallet through the value chain
Use of intermediate pallet sheets
Intermediate pallet sheets must be minimized and used only if this is necessary to ensure quality and transportability of the pallet.
Intermediate pallet sheets are preferred if the alternative to this is intermediate cartons, “Ears” on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) or use of corner trims.
Where intermediate pallet sheets are used, the following requirements apply:
See also Automated storage at distributor – greater understanding of the depalletization process
Example of intermediate pallet sheet that does not meet quality requirements. The intermediate pallet sheet is a thin paper and is not suitable for automatic warehouse systems
Example of what happens when using “thin paper” intermediate pallet sheets.
The sheet is hanging down in the robot. It blocks for sensors that check that the layer is separated from the rest of the pallet. The robot will stop, and manual error correction must be carried out before the machine can be restarted.
Example of pallet with intermediate pallet sheets, too big – hanging on outside the pallet.
Is not suitable.
Intermediate pallet sheets with holes. Is not suitable.
Endringslogg
It is a prerequisite for maintaining strength, that Stock Keeping Units (SKU) are placed within the edges of the pallet with a small margin.
Devices placed on or outside the edge can cause damage with subsequent reduced carrying capacity / risk of injury.
The pallet area should be utilized as best as possible with products. By following the Modular system optimal use of the pallet is ensured and reduces the risk of the load shifting during transport.
Overhang is not accepted.
This is an animation that show what pallets are valid for distribution.
Requirements specifications can be downloaded here:
Requirements for approved EUR-pallets
Specification for reusable 1/1 plastic pallet
Specification for reusable 1/2 plastic pallet
Requirements specification for reusable 1/3 plastic pallet (from NLP)
Specification for reusable 1/4 plastic pallet
Requirements Specification reusable 1/2 wooden pallet
Requirements specification for 1/3 and 1/2 disposable cardboard pallet
The purpose of a standard for labelling of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU) with subsequent electronic data interchange (EDI) is to:
The basis for this is the labelling of each Distribution Unit (DU) with a unique SSCC.
This code is the main key in the electronic Despatch Advice and is linked to information about which GTIN which the Distribution Unit (DU) consists of, the number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) batch / lot number and shelf life information if applicable.
SSCC is the most important key for traceability of Distributions Units (DU), see Recommended way to track and trace a product in the value chain.
For that reason SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
Recommended way to track and trace a product in the value chain
Efficiency and traceability are achieved primarily through:
To ensure rational product and information flow in the distribution chain, STAND recommends a uniform labelling of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and Distribution Units (DU).
This simplifies the labelling of the manufacturer / supplier, shipment by shipper / freight forwarders and merchandise at distributor / store.
This labelling concept also applies to types of transport units other than pallets.
For fish and fish products, the following applies:
STAND has decided to refer to Norwegian Standard NS17099:2020 “Information technology — Fishery and aquaculture products — Requirements for labelling of distribution units and pallets in the trade of fishery and aquaculture products” for products that fall under this category. This standard replaces todays NS9405: 2014 “Fish and fish products. Requirements for labelling of distribution units and pallets in the trade of fish and fish products», and is valid as from 30. September 2020.
It can be ordered from Standard Norway.
Product information on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), with example of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label
Only product information should be labelled on a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
What information to be labelled depends on the type of product.
Intermediate Cartons shall be labelled as Stock Keeping Units (SKU)
Possible product information which SHALL or CAN be labelled on a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Includes GTIN-8 (8 digits), GTIN-12 (12 digits), GTIN-13 (13 digits) and GTIN-14 (14 digits).
All Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must have their own GTIN.
– For variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU), GTIN-14 with a leading digit 9 should be used.
– For other products, GTIN-13 is recommended.
Name of brand owner
– shall be shown in plain text either on the label or on the packaging.
Product name
– Must be written in plain text on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) product label.
– Must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, – and product description.
– The product description labelled on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be identical to the text in the Despatch Advice and Invoice.
-Product description should also contain a package description: for example, Coffee 12 x 500gr.
Batch / lot number
– A number generated by the manufacturer, used to achieve full traceability of product lot/batches in the value chain
– GS1-128 AI 10 must be used.
Shelf life information (“Best before” date, alternatively “Expiry date”)
– Must be labelled on all Stock Keeping Units which has shelf life printed on the Consumer Unit (CU)
GS1-128 AI 15 shall be used for «Best before date”
GS1-128 AI 17 shall be used for «Expiry date»
Net weight
– GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU).
– Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Supplier’s item number
– can be labelled in plain text.
Table showing what SHALL or CAN be labelled:
Overview of product information that shall or may be labelled on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU): | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
GTIN for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
Name of brand owner | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Shelf life | Must be labelled if shelf life is marekd on the Consumer Unit (CU) |
Must be labelled if shelf life is marekd on the Consumer Unit (CU) |
15, alternatively 17 |
n2 + n6
|
Net weight | Must be labelled for products with variable measures |
Must be labelled for products with variable measures |
310x | n4 + n6
|
Supplier’s item no. | Can be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Example of GS1 Product label for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), for a product with “Best before” date and a fixed weight:
Example of GS1 Product label for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), for a product with “Expiry date” and variable measures:
Type of bar code symbol
When labelling with bar code on Stock Keeping Units (SKU) GS1-128 bar code shall be used.
Identical information
Same information (GS1-128 AI) should only occur once per label.
Size and design of labels
Since the shape and size of the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is highly varied, size and design of the label may also vary.
Quality of labels
It is a prerequisite that the labels are readable throughout the value chain for the entire life span of the unit. Therefore, the quality of GS1-128 bar codes must minimum fulfill print quality with “Grade C” according to standard ISO / IEC 15416.
To achieve “Grade C” when reading, “Grade B” or better is recommended at printing.
Quality of labels and bar codes can be verified at GS1 Norway.
Placement of labels on Stock Keeping Units (SKU)
It is recommended that the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is labelled on two sides.
If labelling can only be done on one side, the label on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be on the same side as one of labels on the pallet (consistent orientation).
By column stacking the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label will be oriented towards one pallet label (either on the short or long side of the pallet).
By bond stacking (like bricks) the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label could be oriented towards the two labels of the pallet. That is, both on the short and the long side of the pallet.
Bar codes
The following recommendations apply to GS1-128 bar code symbols:
Placement of bar code symbols on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Placement of bar code symbols on Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with height less than 50 mm
The standard differs on different types of pallets depending on the content.
Only Standard pallet and Promotional Unit can provide a clear labelling of product information that applies to the entire pallet.
Standard pallet
A Distribution Unit (DU) containing the same product (same GTIN) with fixed count of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and where labelling of unique product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) is possible.
It is recommended that a Standard pallet only contain Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with the same batch / lot number and shelf life date.
There are two different types of Standard pallet:
Standard pallet – Low is used for low-frequency products and for products with short shelf life.
A product can only be used on one type of Standard pallet, either 120 cm height or 60 cm height.
Standard pallet with height 120 cm
Standard pallet with height 60 cm (Standard pallet – Low)
Standard pallet shall be labelled with product and transport information.
Since product information and transportation information are usually known at different times, the practical solution is to label the device with two different labels:
Product information on the GS1 product label for Standard pallet
SSCC (License Plate)
Must be labelled with GS1-128 AI 00 on the GS1 Product label on each Standard pallet in human readable text and in the bar code. The SSCC provides a unique identification of each Distribution Unit (DU). Because of traceability a SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
The bar code containing the SSCC should be the lowest bar code on the label. It is recommended to have a bar code containing only the SSCC and no other AI’s.
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Standard pallet must be labelled with GTIN. This can be done in the following ways:
Product name
The product’s name must be written in human readable text on the Distribution Unit’s (DU) product label. Product name must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, and product description. The product description labelled on the Distributions Unit (DU) must correspond to the text in the Despatch Advice and the invoice.
Batch / lot number.
GS1-128 AI 10 is generated by the manufacturer and used to track the product back to specific production series.
If all Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the pallet have the same batch / lot number, this is indicated on the label in human readable text and bar code. If the pallet contains Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with different batch / lot numbers, batch / lot number is omitted on the label. However, all unique batch / lot numbers must be stated in the electronic Despatch Advice.
Shelf life information
GS1-128 AI 15 should be labelled on all Distribution Units (DU) that contain Consumer Unit (CU) with “Best before date” printed on them.
Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking.
Net weight (in grams)
GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure products. Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Gross weight (in whole kg)
Shall be labelled in human readable text on each Distribution Unit (DU). Gross weight means weight of products, packaging and pallet (load carrier).
Max. top load (in whole kg)
Must be labelled in human readable text.
Distribution Units (DU) that can not be stacked (in transport or storing) are marked with: Cannot be stacked (Kan ikke stables).
Temperature requirements
shall be labelled in human readable text if the product has a temperature requirement.
Product labelling on Standard pallet
Overview of product information that shall or may be labelled on Standard pallet: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
SSCC (License Plate)1) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
GTIN for the Distribution Unit (DU)2) | Can be labelled | Can be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
GTIN for the contained Stock Keeping Units (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 02 | n2 + n14 |
Count of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the DU | Must be marked except when DU is defined as an SKU | Must be marked except when DU is defined as an SKU | 37 | n2 + n..8 |
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number3) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Best before date4) | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | 15 | n2 + n6 |
Net weight | Must be labelled for products of variable measure | Must be labelled for products of variable measure | 3103 | n4 + n6 |
Gross weight | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Max. top load | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled if the product has temperature requirements | Not labelled | ||
1) SSCC shall be indicated on the product label but permitted on both labels provided that the same number is used. 2) Can be used in a case for a transitional period. 3) If Batch / Lot No. is omitted on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), or it is different Batch / Lot No. on the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) this should not be labelled on the Distribution Unit (DU). 4) Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking. |
Example on the GS1 product label for Standard pallet
Promotional Unit
A Unit defined as a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) containing a fixed number of Consumer Unit (CU), intended for display in stores.
Promotional Unit can be 1/1 pallet, 1/2 pallet or 1/3 pallet.
Each Promotional Unit has its own load carrier.
Promotional Unit consisting of 1/2 pallet or 1/3 pallet are placed on a slave pallet. This constitutes a transport unit.
If slave pallet is omitted, this must be agreed bilaterally. For example, for 1/2 pallets with good stability, they can be tied together and exclude the slave pallet. This allows for better use of the pallet by increasing the Promotional Unit, thus allowing more items on the pallet.
Promotional Units are labelled with two levels of SSCC:
Labelling of Promotional Units provides increased traceability in the value chain
Product information on the GS1 product label for Promotional Unit
SSCC (License Plate)
Must be labelled with GS1-128 AI 00 on the GS1 Product label on each Promotional Unit in human readable text and in the bar code. The SSCC provides a unique identification of each Distribution Unit (DU). Because of traceability a SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
The bar code containing the SSCC should be the lowest bar code on the label. It is recommended to have a bar code containing only the SSCC and no other AI’s.
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Promotional Unit must be labelled with GTIN. This can be done in the following ways:
Product name
The product’s name must be written in human readable text on the Distribution Unit’s (DU) product label. Product name must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, and product description. The product description labelled on the Distributions Unit (DU) must correspond to the text in the Despatch Advice and the invoice.
Batch / lot number
GS1-128 AI 10 is generated by the manufacturer and used to track the product back to specific production series.
If all Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the Distribution Unit (DU) have the same batch / lot number, this is indicated on the label in plain text and bar code. If the Distribution Unit (DU) contains Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with different batch / lot numbers, batch / lot number is omitted on the label. However, all unique batch / lot numbers must be stated in the electronic Despatch Advice.
Shelf life information
GS1-128 AI 15 should be labelled on all Distribution Units (DU) that contain Consumer Unit (CU) with “Best before date” printed on them.
Consumer Unit (CU). Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking.
Net weight (in grams)
GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU). Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Gross weight (in whole kg)
shall be labelled in human readable text on each Distribution Unit (DU). Gross weight means weight of products, packaging and pallet (load carrier).
Max. top load (in whole kg)
must be labelled in human readable text.
Distribution Units (DU) that can not be stacked (in transport or storing) are marked with: Cannot be stacked.
Temperature requirements
shall be labelled in human readable text if the product has a temperature requirement.
Product labelling on Promotional Unit
Overview of labelling of product information that may or may not be labelled on Promotional Unit: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
SSCC (License Plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
GTIN for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number1) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Best before date2) | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | 15 | n2 + n6 |
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled if the product has temperature requirements | Not labelled | ||
Supplier’s item number | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
1) If Batch / Lot No. is omitted on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), or it is different Batch / Lot No. on the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) this should not be labelled on the Distribution Unit (DU). 2) Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking. |
Example of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label with SSCC for Promotional Unit
Units where product information can not be entered on their own label
Mixed pallet
Two variants of Mixed pallets are described; with and without intermediate pallet.
On Mixed pallet it is not possible to enter product information on its own label.
Mixed pallet without intermediate pallet:
Pallet consisting of several different products.
Mixed pallet with intermediate pallet:
Pallet consisting of several different products, where each product is stacked in one or more layers, and where each different product is separated by an intermediate pallet.
The choice of type of mixed pallet depends, among other things, on handling costs, transport / environmental costs and storage technology and must be agreed bilaterally between the parties.
Packaging and stability of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be considered when choosing type of a Mixed pallet.
If intermediate pallet(s) are used, it shall always be ordered the amount of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) to complete a layer.
Mixed pallet (both with and without intermediate pallet) is labelled with Standard shipping label for Norwegian grocery sector.
Customer packed pallet
When a supplier assembles products for delivery to the final recipient, the products are packaged and labelled with SSCC at two packaging levels.
Customer packed units are labelled for delivery to the end-user and the Distribution Unit (DU) is labelled for delivery to the transit warehouse.
On Customer packed units it is not possible to enter product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) label.
A customer-packed pallet can be Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers, Customer packed unit – single route, multiple customers, or Customer packed unit – single customer.
This Customer packed units does not need to have its own load carrier and is being loaded on a standardized transport unit (for example, an EUR pallet).
Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers and Customer packed unit – single route, multiple customer is stacked in columns per. end receiver.
Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers is split after products receipt in the transit warehouse, and the individual Customer packed unit is forwarded to the final recipient. A prerequisite is that all Customer packed units located on one Distribution Unit (DU) are destined for the same transit warehouse.
Content of the Standard shipping label for the Norwegian grocery sector.
Overview of labelling of Standard shipping label: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
Sender’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Recipient’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Name, address, etc. for the Crossdocking terminal | Must be labelled when the delivery is via the Crossdocking terminal | Not labelled | ||
Buyer’s reference | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Gross weight | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Max. Top load1) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
SSCC (License Plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
1) Max Top load is omitted for Mixed pallet. |
Example of Standard shipping label for the grocery industry
Transport label for Standard pallet
Standard pallet is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry
A GS1 product label on a Standard pallet requires labeling of SSCC, gross weight, top load weight and temperature requirements.
This information can therefore be omitted from Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
If both product label and transport label are used, SSCC can be labelled on both labels provided that the identical number is used.
Transport label for Promotional Unit
The Distribution Unit (DU) containing one or more Promotional Units is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
The Distribution Unit (DU) is identified and labelled with its own SSCC
If the Promotional Unit a 1/1 pallet, the same labelling of transport label as for Standard pallet is used.
Transport label for Mixed pallet
Mixed pallet (both with and without interlayer pallet) is labelled with Standard shipping label for the Norwegian grocery industry.
If the Mixed pallet is not stackable, information on Top load is omitted.
Transport label for Customer packed pallets
The Customer packed pallet is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
Note in particular:
Recipient’s name, address, etc.
As recipient transit warehouse is given and transit address is given as delivery address. The pallet must be labelled with the transit warehouse’s name, street address, postal code and postal address in human readable text.
Name, address, etc. for the distribution warehouse.
The via-field the distribution warehouse is given. The pallet must be labelled with the distributions warehouse’s name, street address, postal code and postal address in human readable text.
Transport label for Customer packed units
Transport Information.
On this label, a separate field has been created for transport information. This is information that the buyer sends to the supplier in his order and which the supplier must put on the Customer packed unit’s transport label.
Format and content of transport information is agreed between the parties.
Content in transport label for customer packed unit
Transport label for customer packed unit: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
Sender’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
End recipients’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Name, address, etc. for the transit warehouse1) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Transport information2) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Buyer’s reference3) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Gross weight4) | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
SSCC Code (licence plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
1) Transit Warehouse where the pallet is split/cross-docked, is stated in the VIA-field | ||||
2) Transport information is agreed between the parties | ||||
3) Example The Customers Ordering Number | ||||
4) Gross weight is the sum of weight of the products, packaging materials and pallet (load carrier) |
Example of shipping label for Customer packed unit
Placement of labels on pallet
Two types of labels shall be used; label for product information and label for transport information.
Identical information
Same information (GS1-128 AI) shall only appear once on the product and transport label.
This means in practice that the same information can not be repeated on the same label or that the same information may appear on multiple labels on the device (pallet).
The exception is SSCC which is allowed on both labels if it is an identical number used.
Size and design of the labels
The following recommendation applies:
Recommended formats are:
Quality of labels
Bar code label with GS1-128 bar codes shall be done according to GS1 General Specifications Chapter 5.4.
Note in particular:
Checklist for optimization of Consumer Unit (CU), Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU)
The checklist is a declaration that the standard is complied with
Endringslogg
The responsibility for determining type of shelf life labelling and total shelf life lies with the manufacturer. The shelf life is calculated from the time the product is ready for sales, for example from after the product has been matured and checked.
The actual shelf life of the product is affected by a variety of conditions, primarily the properties of the raw material and the external impact.
The manufacturers are encouraged to assess whether dynamic shelf life labelling can be practiced.
This means that total shelf life can be expanded when conditions allows for this to be done.
The number of days marked on a product may therefore be more than the number of shelf life on selected products.
According to the Mattilsynet (Norwegian Food Safety Authority), the use of dynamic shelf life is within the current regulations.
Labelling
The packaging (Consumer Units (CU) and Stock Keeping Units (SKU)) shall be labelled according to the manufacturer’s choice of type of shelf life and total shelf life.
Reducing food waste is an overall goal in society. Food waste related to exceeding the limit values of shelf life between the parties in the value chain, constitutes a significant part.
Surveys shows that food waste are significantly reduced if the store and the consumer have a larger part of the total shelf life.
It is therefore a goal that the producer and distributor consume the least amount of available time and that the maximum amount of time is exposed to the consumer.
The grocery industry has defined one Table for allocation of shelf life of a product which regulates the responsibility for and expectations the recipient of products has, linked to shelf life. Online players with b2c sales will be defined as retailers when dividing total shelf life.
In case of minor exceedances of the table’s limit values, participants are expected to seek solutions that provide the lowest possible food waste.
The parties are encouraged to develop performance and collaborate to reduce consumption of shelf life.
Endringslogg
“Expiry date overdue” is the main reason for food waste in the value chain. A more flexible shelf life labelling throughout the year could help reduce food waste.
Shelf life is affected by several conditions that may vary. It is possible to specify increased shelf life in periods of time or for batches. This is termed as “dynamic shelf life». In practice, it means that overall shelf life can be expanded when conditions give the opportunity to do so.
The supplier should inform the customer if dynamic shelf life is applied.
According to the Mattilsynet (Norwegian Food Safety Authority), the use of dynamic shelf life within the current regulations: “It is the manufacturer who assesses and puts the shelf life of the food products. Manufacturers know the raw materials and processes used. Shelf life should be based on common and realistic conditions for transportation, storage and sales. This does not prevent manufacturers from taking into account that there may also be different external conditions for the shelf life of the foodstuffs. In practice, manufacturers often put the shelf life out of the most demanding but realistic conditions throughout the year. If the business has full control and overview of the terms, nothing stops them from choosing different shelf life throughout the year for the same product. This means the food is given a shelf life that is adapted to season, temperature and other conditions.”
More information can be found here: http://www.mattilsynet.no/mat_og_vann/merking_av_mat/generelle_krav_til_merking_av_mat/holdbarhetsmerking_paa_matvarer.2711
Examples of using dynamic shelf life that could have longer shelf life than often is the practice today:
In order to make a realistic assessment, the producer assumes that the products are stored in normal outdoor / room temperature for a shorter period of time through the value chain, such as transshipment, stock refills in stores, consumer carts, transport from store to home and in the home (in and out of the fridge and on the kitchen table). In summer, the outdoor / room temperature is higher and thus has a greater impact on shelf life. To make a realistic assessment, it’s normal to take into account the assumptions in the summer period and determine the shelf life based on this, and the same shelf life is normally used throughout the year.
Different companies may have different production methods and / or hygiene standards. To make a realistic assessment, the starting point is the technology that provides the shortest shelf life.
The regulations or internal rules stipulate that raw materials that are up to x days “old” may be used at any given time in the manufacturing process. Then the shelf life is determined by using x-day-old raw material each time. This even though you often use fresher raw materials than x days.
Raw material quality may vary naturally over a year, and in some cases this may affect shelf life. To make a realistic assessment, the raw material with the shortest shelf life is used, and normally uses the same shelf life of the finished foods throughout the year.
Dynamic shelf life and the EPD database
There is no need for any changes to the EPD database to utilize dynamic shelf life.
It is the product’s shortest shelf life during the year the supplier must register in the EPD database.
The risk of food waste is related to the remaining shelf life of a product. To avoid food waste, the players in the grocery industry have agreed to exhibit flexibility in the value chain to handle minor deviations in assessment of shelf life. This is done by establish bilateral agreements.
Bilateral agreements will contribute to more flexible assessment of shelf life, thereby reducing food waste in the value chain (manufacturers, distributors, retailers), considering specific and specific conditions, such as geographical distance to customer / market, and volume of sales.
The grocery industry has defined a table for the assessment of total shelf life, based on a three-division between manufacturer, distributor and retailer / consumer. The table prepared for this applies unless otherwise agreed bilaterally.
For products with short shelf life (42 days or less), conditions such as distance to the market and volume of sales will be decisive for determining optimal assessment of shelf life.
How to establish bilateral agreements
The assessment of shelf life as stated in the table is the basis for the bilateral agreements.
All parties can initiate bilateral agreements based on expected potential for reduction of total food waste.
Description of how the risk will be shared should be included in the agreements.
Measuring consumed shelf life in the value chain is an instrument for securing facts and monitoring development.
Some examples of situations where it may be appropriate to establish bilateral agreements:
One example of reducing waste for products with short shelf life is that a supplier in the eastern part of Norway establish a bilateral agreement with a customer regarding a better date than is stated in the table for deliveries to, for example, northern part of Norway, while for example a customer in the middle and western part of Norway receives deliveries according to the table and with the possibility of deviating dates for smaller volumes for deliveries to the southern and eastern part of Norway.
Products delivered at the beginning of a week is quickly reaching the distributor / distribution centre and the retailer before the weekend and is less prone to simple date deviations. Similarly, it is less appropriate to deliver products with “last day according to STAND” or with date deviations on Fridays, if they will not be received by distributor / distribution centre before Sunday evening / Monday.
In advance of a promotional period, a delivery agreement with a few day date deviations may be applicable, as these products will have higher turnover than usual for the distributor / distribution centre and at retailers. To reduce the risk of increased drop by lower turnover than usual at the distributor / distribution centre and at retailer at the end of the promotional period, a better date should be provided than indicated in the table.
Depending on the product / value chain, it may be advisable to redistribute days. For example:
Product with uneven turnover at retailers and / or a lot of waste at retailers.
Here it may be advisable to redefine days from supplier and / or distributor to retail days.
Product with steady turnover at retailers and / or a small amount of food waste.
Here it may be advisable to redefine days from retail and / or distributor to supplier.
In its framework, STAND has defined guidelines, recommendations and best practices for how products should be marketed in the distribution chain, and how information on this should be exchanged between the parties.
Central to this is the consideration of the consumer and his expectation for safe food.
The guidelines for tracking, recall and withdrawal do not define food quality requirements, but describe what procedures and processes the industry has established to mitigate any unwanted effects should an incident or crisis occur in a product.
Best practices
The guidelines describe best practices in this area.
By following STAND’s framework, the guidelines will be achievable for all parties involved.
Some important prerequisites for best practice.
By ensuring that a total industry complies with STAND’s framework, consumers’ demands and expectations for safe food are fully met.
Objective of the guidelines
The guidelines are aimed at “Contribute to meet consumers’ expectations for safe products”.
Target Audience:
Products / areas to which the guidelines apply:
Medicines are exempt from the guidelines. Here we refer to separate regulations, not described here.
Certain types of food may be subject to additional regulatory requirements beyond what is described here. An example is the EU’s new tobacco directive (EU 2014/40) which make the requirements for traceability of tobacco products more stringent, but is not described here.
Legislative anchoring of the guidelines
The guidelines are among others based on Norwegian or European regulations on food safety and traceability:
Each party has an obligation to familiarize themselves with the regulations that apply to the products your business sells or are involved in.
The legislation does not impose requirements on how tracking should be performed, and what systems in which tracking information should be recorded. Manual systems may be sufficient as long as the requirements for tracking and tracking information are met.
Routines
The guidelines cover two procedures
Prepare crisis procedures
This is included:
At the heart of the legislation is the duty of each company to carry out a risk analysis of the health risks the products represent and how the company will relate to this in terms of traceability.
The purpose of the analysis is to reduce / prevent risk through
This assumes that the parties are aware of the risks the products may pose and have a preparedness that ensures that they react quickly, correctly and effectively in unwanted incidents. A Risk Analysis should therefore be performed on new products based on an intended relevant incident, so that it can be implemented as quickly as possible should a real incident occur for the product.
The risk analysis consists of three elements that both the government and industry should work on in an equal way:
See more about risk analysis here Design and content of a Risk Analysis.
If unwanted incidents or crises occur, it is important to be well prepared.
Possible scenarios for what might arise should be thought through and how this should be handled.
A Contingency Plan must be prepared that will allow you to cope with the situation quickly, correctly and effectively. The Contingency Plan must be accurate and accessible to all involved at all times.
The Contingency Plan includes:
See more about the Contingency Plan here Design and contents of a Contingency Plan.
The legislation requires that each company must have systems to document which products are purchased from each supplier and which customer has purchased the company’s finished products.
This also includes raw materials and other input that are covered by the legislation.
There is no requirement in the legislation for which type of systems to be used for this.
Businesses can practice more comprehensive tracking systems than the minimum regulatory requirements require, but this is either based on self-imposed requirements or agreements with, and orders from the contracting parties.
Tracking means being able to follow the physical flow of goods. This is often referred to as chain traceability, and assumes that all parties meet the requirements and follow the guidelines for tracking.
Tracking takes into account the legal requirements for all parties to be able to trace their products one step forward and one step back in the value chain.
Tracking one step forward:
This means to the address the products are delivered to.
An invoice system containing information about item number / item name, customer number / customer name and invoice date is sufficient to be able to trace one step forward in the value chain.
If the company is using batch/lot numbers for their products, this should be included in the invoice, despatch advice and the like, or linked directly to the company’s own systems.
Tracking one step backward:
This means the address from which the products are delivered.
The company must keep a log of received products describing which products were purchased from whom and in which quantitiy, and date.
If the addresses for where products are delivered from or delivered to are not in accordance with the legal ownership of the products and the invoice process, this should be agreed separately between the parties.
The main purpose of the tracking information is to lay the groundwork for effective blocking, withdrawal or recall of products.
Central tracking information is:
It is a requirement that the products are labeled to enable tracking.
The marking must be affixed to the product packaging and legible.
The following applies to finished goods traded between supplier and distributor / retailer:
Information to be marked:
Load carrier (for example pallet) shall be marked with SSCC.
The sender must in his system have an overview of which recipient the product was sent to, and also the recipient must have an overview of which sender the product was received from. Both sender and recipient must be identified with GLN.
Sender shall in his system register:
Recipient shall in his system register:
The following applies to raw materials and other inputs:
More about tracking information and how the product can be tracked in the value chain is described here Recommended traceability methods in the value chain.
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has, which may be relevant in production of a product to be traded in the grocery industry.
The process includes producing the product (Consumer Unit), packing it to a sales unit, usually a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), fully packaged and labelled.
The areas described are:
In its framework, STAND has defined guidelines, recommendations and best practices for how products should be marketed in the distribution chain, and how information on this should be exchanged between the parties.
Central to this is the consideration of the consumer and his expectation for safe food.
The guidelines for tracking, recall and withdrawal do not define food quality requirements, but describe what procedures and processes the industry has established to mitigate any unwanted effects should an incident or crisis occur in a product.
Best practices
The guidelines describe best practices in this area.
By following STAND’s framework, the guidelines will be achievable for all parties involved.
Some important prerequisites for best practice.
By ensuring that a total industry complies with STAND’s framework, consumers’ demands and expectations for safe food are fully met.
Objective of the guidelines
The guidelines are aimed at “Contribute to meet consumers’ expectations for safe products”.
Target Audience:
Products / areas to which the guidelines apply:
Medicines are exempt from the guidelines. Here we refer to separate regulations, not described here.
Certain types of food may be subject to additional regulatory requirements beyond what is described here. An example is the EU’s new tobacco directive (EU 2014/40) which make the requirements for traceability of tobacco products more stringent, but is not described here.
The main purpose of the tracking information is to lay the groundwork for effective blocking, withdrawal or recall of products.
Central tracking information is:
It is a requirement that the products are labeled to enable tracking.
The marking must be affixed to the product packaging and legible.
The following applies to finished goods traded between supplier and distributor / retailer:
Information to be marked:
Load carrier (for example pallet) shall be marked with SSCC.
The sender must in his system have an overview of which recipient the product was sent to, and also the recipient must have an overview of which sender the product was received from. Both sender and recipient must be identified with GLN.
Sender shall in his system register:
Recipient shall in his system register:
The following applies to raw materials and other inputs:
More about tracking information and how the product can be tracked in the value chain is described here Recommended traceability methods in the value chain.
Background
The need for information both in trade and to the consumer is constantly increasing. Today’s solution using the EAN-13 barcode does not provide opportunities for additional machine-readable information. The need for more information has led to products that have more than one bar code applied to Consumer Units, which creates challenges both at the checkout point (POS) and in the value chain. Often this is a QR code with a link to a website where the consumer can find more information.
In parallel with the need for more communication with consumers, a need is emerging at the retail level to gain more control over the traceability and expiry date of the products, to ensure safe food and reduce food waste. This is happening in most countries in the world. In Norway, GS1 Norway, together with Matvett, established a working group consisting of representatives from brand suppliers, grocery chains, system suppliers and other stakeholders to discuss these issues. These guidelines are a result of this work and have now been included as part of STAND’s framework for the Norwegian grocery industry.
Purpose of the use of 2D barcodes in Norwegian grocery
Although 2D barcodes are not the only solution to the challenges, this is the data carrier of the future, where the need for information is greater than just identifying a product with GTIN. 2D barcodes take up less space, can contain more information about the product, are a tool for reducing food waste and increase food security, are more flexible, and can be read by mobile phones. This provides an opportunity for increased consumer contact. In addition, 2D barcodes can solve all needs for information exchange throughout the supply chain, including being able to link to websites.
Different types of 2D barcodes
There are many different 2D barcodes, but only some of them can be used in connection with the GS1 standards, which are the standards used by the Norwegian grocery industry. The different 2D barcodes are also used for different purposes. This is regulated in GS1’s regulations, General Specifications. The difference between the different 2D barcodes helps to determine what they can be used for.
QR Code
The QR Code barcode is in the GS1 system defined to be used only with GS1 Digital Link URI syntax. In practice, this means that this should only be used for communication with the consumer via a URL that links to a website with more information that the consumer can read with his mobile phone. QR Code has grown to become the preferred barcode for consumer communication and most mobile phones today are able to read this with the built-in camera app in the phone. This means that the threshold for reading QR Code is low among consumers, and it is less need for training and communication to put functionality related to QR Code into production. Here you can find more information about QR codes.
GS1 Datamatrix
GS1 Datamatrix is a variant of Datamatrix that uses GS1 Element String syntax. This is the use of AI (Application Identifier) structure. This is a way of structuring the information in the barcode so that everyone who reads the barcode understands the content in the same way regardless of the order in which the information is printed and how much information is in the barcode. According to GS1 General Specifications, GS1 Datamatrix is only permitted for use on Consumer units with variable measure and prescription medicines. However, it is permitted to use it in limited pilots, for test purposes and in closed value chains under controlled conditions. The advantage of GS1 Datamatrix is that it has high compression and error correction. It can be printed both square and rectangular so that it can fit where there is not enough height, but enough width to get the information needed without compromising on size and thus readability. However, the rectangular version has a limit on the amount of data that can be used. GS1 Datamatrix is the only permitted barcode on prescription drugs. Here you can find more information about GS1 Datamatrix.
Content in barcode
A minimum requirement for information attributes has been defined for POS purposes.
This is:
It is possible to use other Application Identifiers for internal and/or external needs, but this is then up to each individual actor to use.
Reducing food waste is an overall goal in society. Food waste related to exceeding the limit values of shelf life between the parties in the value chain, constitutes a significant part.
Surveys shows that food waste are significantly reduced if the store and the consumer have a larger part of the total shelf life.
It is therefore a goal that the producer and distributor consume the least amount of available time and that the maximum amount of time is exposed to the consumer.
The grocery industry has defined one Table for allocation of shelf life of a product which regulates the responsibility for and expectations the recipient of products has, linked to shelf life. Online players with b2c sales will be defined as retailers when dividing total shelf life.
In case of minor exceedances of the table’s limit values, participants are expected to seek solutions that provide the lowest possible food waste.
The parties are encouraged to develop performance and collaborate to reduce consumption of shelf life.
Endringslogg
The responsibility for determining type of shelf life labelling and total shelf life lies with the manufacturer. The shelf life is calculated from the time the product is ready for sales, for example from after the product has been matured and checked.
The actual shelf life of the product is affected by a variety of conditions, primarily the properties of the raw material and the external impact.
The manufacturers are encouraged to assess whether dynamic shelf life labelling can be practiced.
This means that total shelf life can be expanded when conditions allows for this to be done.
The number of days marked on a product may therefore be more than the number of shelf life on selected products.
According to the Mattilsynet (Norwegian Food Safety Authority), the use of dynamic shelf life is within the current regulations.
Labelling
The packaging (Consumer Units (CU) and Stock Keeping Units (SKU)) shall be labelled according to the manufacturer’s choice of type of shelf life and total shelf life.
“Expiry date overdue” is the main reason for food waste in the value chain. A more flexible shelf life labelling throughout the year could help reduce food waste.
Shelf life is affected by several conditions that may vary. It is possible to specify increased shelf life in periods of time or for batches. This is termed as “dynamic shelf life». In practice, it means that overall shelf life can be expanded when conditions give the opportunity to do so.
The supplier should inform the customer if dynamic shelf life is applied.
According to the Mattilsynet (Norwegian Food Safety Authority), the use of dynamic shelf life within the current regulations: “It is the manufacturer who assesses and puts the shelf life of the food products. Manufacturers know the raw materials and processes used. Shelf life should be based on common and realistic conditions for transportation, storage and sales. This does not prevent manufacturers from taking into account that there may also be different external conditions for the shelf life of the foodstuffs. In practice, manufacturers often put the shelf life out of the most demanding but realistic conditions throughout the year. If the business has full control and overview of the terms, nothing stops them from choosing different shelf life throughout the year for the same product. This means the food is given a shelf life that is adapted to season, temperature and other conditions.”
More information can be found here: http://www.mattilsynet.no/mat_og_vann/merking_av_mat/generelle_krav_til_merking_av_mat/holdbarhetsmerking_paa_matvarer.2711
Examples of using dynamic shelf life that could have longer shelf life than often is the practice today:
In order to make a realistic assessment, the producer assumes that the products are stored in normal outdoor / room temperature for a shorter period of time through the value chain, such as transshipment, stock refills in stores, consumer carts, transport from store to home and in the home (in and out of the fridge and on the kitchen table). In summer, the outdoor / room temperature is higher and thus has a greater impact on shelf life. To make a realistic assessment, it’s normal to take into account the assumptions in the summer period and determine the shelf life based on this, and the same shelf life is normally used throughout the year.
Different companies may have different production methods and / or hygiene standards. To make a realistic assessment, the starting point is the technology that provides the shortest shelf life.
The regulations or internal rules stipulate that raw materials that are up to x days “old” may be used at any given time in the manufacturing process. Then the shelf life is determined by using x-day-old raw material each time. This even though you often use fresher raw materials than x days.
Raw material quality may vary naturally over a year, and in some cases this may affect shelf life. To make a realistic assessment, the raw material with the shortest shelf life is used, and normally uses the same shelf life of the finished foods throughout the year.
Dynamic shelf life and the EPD database
There is no need for any changes to the EPD database to utilize dynamic shelf life.
It is the product’s shortest shelf life during the year the supplier must register in the EPD database.
The purpose of a standard for labelling of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU) with subsequent electronic data interchange (EDI) is to:
The basis for this is the labelling of each Distribution Unit (DU) with a unique SSCC.
This code is the main key in the electronic Despatch Advice and is linked to information about which GTIN which the Distribution Unit (DU) consists of, the number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) batch / lot number and shelf life information if applicable.
SSCC is the most important key for traceability of Distributions Units (DU), see Recommended way to track and trace a product in the value chain.
For that reason SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
Recommended way to track and trace a product in the value chain
Efficiency and traceability are achieved primarily through:
To ensure rational product and information flow in the distribution chain, STAND recommends a uniform labelling of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and Distribution Units (DU).
This simplifies the labelling of the manufacturer / supplier, shipment by shipper / freight forwarders and merchandise at distributor / store.
This labelling concept also applies to types of transport units other than pallets.
For fish and fish products, the following applies:
STAND has decided to refer to Norwegian Standard NS17099:2020 “Information technology — Fishery and aquaculture products — Requirements for labelling of distribution units and pallets in the trade of fishery and aquaculture products” for products that fall under this category. This standard replaces todays NS9405: 2014 “Fish and fish products. Requirements for labelling of distribution units and pallets in the trade of fish and fish products», and is valid as from 30. September 2020.
It can be ordered from Standard Norway.
Product information on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), with example of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label
Only product information should be labelled on a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
What information to be labelled depends on the type of product.
Intermediate Cartons shall be labelled as Stock Keeping Units (SKU)
Possible product information which SHALL or CAN be labelled on a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Includes GTIN-8 (8 digits), GTIN-12 (12 digits), GTIN-13 (13 digits) and GTIN-14 (14 digits).
All Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must have their own GTIN.
– For variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU), GTIN-14 with a leading digit 9 should be used.
– For other products, GTIN-13 is recommended.
Name of brand owner
– shall be shown in plain text either on the label or on the packaging.
Product name
– Must be written in plain text on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) product label.
– Must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, – and product description.
– The product description labelled on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be identical to the text in the Despatch Advice and Invoice.
-Product description should also contain a package description: for example, Coffee 12 x 500gr.
Batch / lot number
– A number generated by the manufacturer, used to achieve full traceability of product lot/batches in the value chain
– GS1-128 AI 10 must be used.
Shelf life information (“Best before” date, alternatively “Expiry date”)
– Must be labelled on all Stock Keeping Units which has shelf life printed on the Consumer Unit (CU)
GS1-128 AI 15 shall be used for «Best before date”
GS1-128 AI 17 shall be used for «Expiry date»
Net weight
– GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU).
– Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Supplier’s item number
– can be labelled in plain text.
Table showing what SHALL or CAN be labelled:
Overview of product information that shall or may be labelled on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU): | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
GTIN for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
Name of brand owner | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Shelf life | Must be labelled if shelf life is marekd on the Consumer Unit (CU) |
Must be labelled if shelf life is marekd on the Consumer Unit (CU) |
15, alternatively 17 |
n2 + n6
|
Net weight | Must be labelled for products with variable measures |
Must be labelled for products with variable measures |
310x | n4 + n6
|
Supplier’s item no. | Can be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Example of GS1 Product label for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), for a product with “Best before” date and a fixed weight:
Example of GS1 Product label for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), for a product with “Expiry date” and variable measures:
Type of bar code symbol
When labelling with bar code on Stock Keeping Units (SKU) GS1-128 bar code shall be used.
Identical information
Same information (GS1-128 AI) should only occur once per label.
Size and design of labels
Since the shape and size of the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is highly varied, size and design of the label may also vary.
Quality of labels
It is a prerequisite that the labels are readable throughout the value chain for the entire life span of the unit. Therefore, the quality of GS1-128 bar codes must minimum fulfill print quality with “Grade C” according to standard ISO / IEC 15416.
To achieve “Grade C” when reading, “Grade B” or better is recommended at printing.
Quality of labels and bar codes can be verified at GS1 Norway.
Placement of labels on Stock Keeping Units (SKU)
It is recommended that the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is labelled on two sides.
If labelling can only be done on one side, the label on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be on the same side as one of labels on the pallet (consistent orientation).
By column stacking the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label will be oriented towards one pallet label (either on the short or long side of the pallet).
By bond stacking (like bricks) the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label could be oriented towards the two labels of the pallet. That is, both on the short and the long side of the pallet.
Bar codes
The following recommendations apply to GS1-128 bar code symbols:
Placement of bar code symbols on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Placement of bar code symbols on Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with height less than 50 mm
Bar code label with GS1-128 bar codes shall be done according to GS1 General Specifications Chapter 5.4.
Note in particular:
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has, which may be relevant in production of a product to be traded in the grocery industry.
The process includes producing the product (Consumer Unit), packing it to a sales unit, usually a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), fully packaged and labelled.
The areas described are:
The process is a generic description of a production process and may vary in different manufacturing companies.
Order of activities described may also differ from how this is done in your business.
Production includes the following sub processes:
Areas affected by and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
This process varies from business to business, and from product to product.
STAND has no guidance on how to do this but has developed guidelines within the following main areas:
(Last changed February 17, 2022)
Implementation of the Tobacco Directive in Norwegian retail sector
The Tobacco Directive is an EU regulation, based on the WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control. The protocol entered into force on 25 September 2018. Both the EU and Norway have committed themselves to following this protocol.
The protocol stipulates that the parties shall provide a licensing, labeling and tracking system for tobacco products and associated economic activity in connection with the production and transport of tobacco products and production equipment. This is often referred to as the Tobacco Directive.
The directive will be implemented through 3 regulations:
EU 2018/574 Implementing Regulation: Technical standards for the establishment and operation of a tracking system for tobacco products.
EU 2018/573 Commission Delegated Regulation: Key elements in data storage agreements that are to be included as part of a tracking system for tobacco products.
EU 2018/576 Commission Implementing Decision: Technical standards for safety features applied to tobacco products.
The Tobacco Directive covers all tobacco and tobacco-related products, as well as equipment for their production.
For EU members, the tracking system for cigarettes and roll-your-own tobacco came into force on 20 May 2019. For other tobacco products, 20 May 2024 applies.
The Tobacco Directive was incorporated into the EEA Agreement on 4 February 2022. For Norway (and other EFTA countries), the implementation deadlines follow transitional provisions laid down by the EEA Committee. As of 4 February, implementation deadlines have not been decided.
The Commission Delegated Regulation came into force on 1 November 2020 in Norway.
The Implementing Regulation describes technical standards for how the tracking system should make it possible to track the entire journey the product has been on, from production until the tobacco product is ready for sale to the consumer.
Unique identification code for all players
All players that are part of the supply chain must have a unique identification code. This also applies to facilities where tobacco products are produced, stored or put on the market, such as production premises and machines, warehouses, terminals, vending machines, etc.
Unique identification mark on all products at all packaging levels
The identification code shall be included in a unique identification mark affixed to individual packages and / or packaging containing more than one individual package of tobacco products (aggregated units). The mark shall make it possible to determine the date and place of production, as well as the route to be used from the production stage to the retailer.
An item cannot be legally traded unless it bears a unique identification mark.
Registration and reporting of tracking information
The Implementing Regulation imposes on market participants a responsibility for the registration and reporting of tracking information. Manufacturers and importers are required to enter into an agreement with a supplier of a Primary Repository to which they must report. The Primary Repository shall be financed by the manufacturer or importer, but operate independently of them.
The Commission has entered into an agreement with a Secondary Repository to collect the information from the Primary Repository. It is in the Secondary Repository that complete tracking information from production to the first retail outlet can take place.
To ensure the independence of the tracking system, and to ensure that it is controlled by national authorities, the authorities shall designate an independent ID issuer who will be responsible for generating the unique identification marks used to track the products. All players will have to buy the stamps for a fixed unit price determined by the ID issuer.
The Tobacco Damage Act requires a license to import, export and produce tobacco products and equipment for tobacco production. Permission shall be granted to the legal entity that has the financial interest in and responsibility for the business. Legal entity includes legal persons and sole proprietorships, and thus excludes that private persons can obtain a license.
Different types of grant are distinguished; for example, there is one license for import and another one for production. Imports of tobacco products for own use (private import) are not covered by the regulation.
Together with the registration scheme for retailers and wholesalers that came into force in January 2018, the regulation will lead to better control of the entire supply chain for tobacco products and production equipment in Norway.
In 2018, the Parliament of Norway passed a new § 16 h in the Tobacco Damage Act, which states that it is prohibited to bring into Norway, sell or move from production facilities individual packages of tobacco products that are not marked with a security feature.
The ban does not apply to private import of tobacco products for personal use.
The security feature shall, together with the tracking system, facilitate the better monitoring and enforcement of compliance with the requirements of the Tobacco Directive.
The security feature must be secured against tampering, and consists of visible and invisible elements which are applied to the package in such a way that it cannot be removed, cannot be erased and is not hidden or can be broken. The security feature must not be placed in a way that conflicts with other statutory requirements for the labeling of tobacco products, e.g. requirements for health warnings. The detailed rules are laid down in the Commission Implementing Decision.
The purpose of the Commission Implementing Decision is to enable the authorities and consumers to identify legally produced and imported tobacco products.
The manufacturer or importer of the goods is responsible for the security feature being produced and applied to the packages before the products are made available on the Norwegian market.
Unlike the unique identification mark associated with the tracking system, the security feature will only be visible on individual packages.
It follows from the Commission Implementing Decision that individual packages of cigarettes and roll-your-own tobacco that are produced or imported into one of the EU Member States after 20 May 2019 must have a security feature affixed.
For other tobacco products, the requirement applies as of 20 May 2024.
For Norway and the other EFTA states, deadlines and possibly transitional periods are stipulated in the agreement on the incorporation of the decision into the EEA agreement.
The Commission Implementing Decision establishes a common set of rules with technical standards for the design of the security feature. It is a requirement that the security feature must consist of at least five different authentication elements. The Commission Implementing Decision contains an overview of recommended proposals for authentication elements that national authorities can choose from, and combine, when the requirement for the security feature is to be determined in national law.
To prevent outdated solutions, the Commission Implementing Decision lays down rules that the authorities may lay down provisions for the regular replacement of authentication elements.
The new amendments to the Tobacco Directive are expected to be introduced in stages.
The Commission Delegated Regulation entered into force on 1 November 2020, with transitional schemes until 15 June 2021.
It has not been decided when the Commission Implementing Decision and the Implementing Regulation will enter into force in Norway. It is assumed that this will not happen until 2022 at the earliest. Proposals for supplementary rules for Norway have been sent to the EEA Commission in Brussels for consideration, so that the regulations can be incorporated into Norwegian law by reference in regulations, with the changes that will follow as of adaptations to the EEA Agreement.
A natural order indicates that the Commission Implementing Decision is introduced first, and that the Implementing Regulation follows thereafter. For both, transitional rules will apply, which will be decided upon incorporation of the regulations into the EEA Agreement.
Through STAND, DMF and DLF will follow the political process as it moves forward. STAND will establish a project group to study the practical consequences of the introduction of the Tobacco Directive, with a mandate to propose actions that the retail sector can initiate so that a transition can take place in a best possible way.
Some key areas that the group will look into:
Do you need more information?
If you have further questions related to the implementation of the Tobacco Directive, you can address these to support@stand.no
In case of delay, a distinction is made between notified and unannounced. Separate routines have been established for:
Any delay must be notified immediately with the information available at the time of notification. Message must be sent to the department of category / purchase and the department of logistics.
Any delay must be notified immediately with the information available at the time of notification. Message must be sent to the department of category / purchase and department of logistics.
Launch will not be subject to major deviations between forecast (A4 in timeline) and actual ordering. In general, product news should be ready for pick-up from supplier from Monday U-2, or at the agreed time.
Requirements specification for 1/3 and ½ disposable cardboard pallet
STATUS: MUST BE BILATERALLY AGREED
Disposable 1/3 and ½ pallet in cardboard is not an approved pallet in the Norwegian grocery industry and must be agreed bilaterally if it is to be used
Requirements Specification reusable ½ wooden pallet
STATUS: MUST BE BILATERALLY AGREED
Recycled ½ pallet in wood is not an approved pallet in the Norwegian grocery industry and must be bilaterally agreed if it is to be used
Size, Gross size: 600 mm x 800 mm
Specification for reusable ¼ plastic pallet
STATUS: MUST BE BILATERALLY AGREED
Reused ¼ pallet in plastic is not an approved pallet in the Norwegian grocery industry and must be bilaterally agreed if it is to be used.
Requirements specification only applies when a return system has been established for such pallets.
Requirements specification for reusable 1/3 plastic pallet (from NLP)
STATUS: APPLICABLE STANDARD
Specification for reusable ½ plastic pallet
STATUS: APPLICABLE STANDARD
Specification for reusable 1/1 plastic pallet
STATUS: APPLICABLE STANDARD
Requirements for approved EUR-pallets
Facts
Nail pattern
Marking:
Left block Centre block Right block (2 options)
The EPAL brand may be replaced by the mark of European railway companies.
Unapproved pallets:
If there are one or more defects on the pallet, as shown below, the pallet is not approved.
The pallet must be repaired according to UIC code 435-4.
An upper or lower board is damaged so that more than one nail or screw is visible
A board is missing
A block is missing or broken so that more than one nail is visible
A block cannot be twisted more than 10mm protruding.
A board is broken across or diagonally
More than two outer boards are damaged, and more than one nail or screw is visible on each board
Other requirements (Bad general condition):
ISPM No. 15
ISPM No. 15 is an international standard for treating and marking of wood packaging used in international trade. The standard specifies requirements for heat treatment or gasification of the wood or the wood packaging itself with methyl bromide to kill wood pestilators and that this is documented by the marking of the wooden packaging
The standard also sets requirements for barking of the wood.
Wooden packaging that crosses the EU’s outer borders should be marked with this symbol. Wood packaging produced and used in Norway is exempt treatment and marking.
More information on Mattilsynet’s website:
http://www.mattilsynet.no/planter_og_dyrking/tommer_trelast_og_treemballasje/treemballasje/internasjonal_standard_for_treemballasje__ispm_nr_15.8473
IPPC symbol, country code, registration number, HT (for heat treated), license number-year-month
ISPM 15 treated pallets shall be marked on the center blocks on the long sides
ISPM 15 markings can also be marked on the center blocks on the short sides
Intentions for measurement of service level
Measurement of service levels is a topic that most players are concerned with and are an important element in the relationships between supplier and customer.
The parties are free to agree whether to measure the degree of service.
If the parties agree to establish an agreement, STAND recommends that STAND’s definitions be used.
A challenge in relation to the exchange and evaluation of service level data has been that the trading partners often use different definitions and conditions for measurement and follow-up.
The recommendation contains suggestions for target measures and common definitions for measuring service levels. The purpose is to establish a common platform as a basis for measurement, communication and mutual evaluation of performance.
Joint exchanges of measurement results, based on the proposed definitions, could contribute to improved service levels and contribute to increased understanding of the parties’ views on customer and delivery services.
Target measures are based on DLFs (Dagligvaruleverantörers Förbund) and DULOGs (Dagligvaruhandelns Utvecklings- och Logistikgrupp ) common definitions, established in Sweden in 1998.
With this as a base as well as experience from companies with international relations, the prioritized definitions build upon the need for common understanding, measurement and evaluation of cross-border service.
With continuous follow-up, development and trends can be monitored over time. This will probably be more interesting than single results. Greater trend deviations are when warning signals and improvement programs should be implemented to reduce the likelihood that a similar situation will arise in the future.
Target measures
The recommendation describes 6 different target measures, of which STAND recommends that 3 of these are prioritized, as these can be quickly implemented in today’s systems.
Other target measures are composed of different combinations of priority targets.
Selection of target measures is done by the parties themselves and described in bilateral agreements.
The industry has an increasing focus on improving the service level to consumers, ie reducing out-of-stock in the stores. This is currently being worked on, including developing agreed definitions of how this should be measured and followed up. The following two KPIs can be used:
1. Lost sales:
When stock is zero at the end of the day, this will be set off against lost sales in the store.
Example: You have sold 40 during the day, and at the end of the day, the stock is zero. If this item had a sales forecast of 100 that day, the shelf service level of this item would be 40%.
When you aggregate this to store level, we will get a figure of how many customers were actually affected (based on the forecast) by the empty shelf.
2. Empty shelf
Number of article lines / products with stock = 0
Empty Shelf = ———————————————- ———————-
Number of article lines / products in the assortment in total
Assortment is defined as what purchasing / category management has decided.
Deviations between what the individual store has in their space program, and the defined assortment for the store may have to be measured with a separate key figure; assortment loyalty.
For the reports, inventory = 0 means that inventory is 0 or less than zero in the store’s systems.
Other priority target measures:
Combined target measures:
The target measures can be used by both the customer and the supplier for follow-up of each other’s performance.
Prerequisites for target measures and definitions
Measure
In the measurements, the unit of measurement is described as “sales unit».
It is recommended that Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is used as a sales unit. Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is established in most systems and is the base for transactions; ex. ordering, delivery, billing etc. to the store.
Consumer Units (CU) as a unit of measurement, however, should be the vision and goal of the future, as the Consumer Unit (CU) is the unit of measurement that is uniform and shared throughout the value chain.
Agreement on measurement of service level
Which target measures to use and what definitions should apply should be anchored in a bilateral agreement.
The agreement can regulate conditions such as:
Coops automatiske varelager CLog er et eksempel på hvordan fremtidens distribusjon av dagligvareprodukter vil se ut. (more…)
What areas the standard for assortments changes apply to
Assortment changes including phase-in and phase-out of products, both new products and codes for changes to assortment/ changes in listings.
Supplies of Promotional Units and campaigns are not included.
Seasonal product defines as “Product sold for a limited period of time related to a season defined between the contracting parties”.
Seasonal products are launched according to the same template as regular news, with the following exceptions:
An overview of seasonal time frames and respective deadlines is clearly described in agreements between the parties.
Bilateral agreements such as pre-launch and / or campaigns which does not affect deliveries to other parties can be included. Pre launch defines as “Bilateral agreement between supplier and customer to launch a product ahead of the regular launch time frame, or season”.
STAND Assortment describes recommended activities, processes and deadlines at assortment changes in the different profiles in the various retail chains.
In general, new products should be launched in L1 and L3. Regarding relaunches, minor changes and selected big news, products can also be launched in L2 by agreement with customer
It is a united request from both grocery suppliers, distributors and retail chains that the actors jointly contribute to the most effective processes in implementing assortment changes.
The purpose of the standard is to help maintain the flow of products, avoid empty stock in the value chain and reduce costs, return and obsolescence.
This can be achieved by:
The standard includes the following sub processes:
The deadlines are scarce, and in order to achieve successful assortment range changes, it is very important that the recommended standard timeline and deadlines are followed.
A prerequisite for success is the following guideline for the work:
Get it right the first time – on time
Watch an animation about the main aspects of Assortment here
changeling
Good service level in the entire value chain is today a prerequisite for rational and competitive product flow, which in turn assumes that the performance can be measured and followed up.
Measurement and evaluation of service levels are crucial to prioritize and implement measures aimed at continuous improvements.
The parties are free to agree whether to measure the degree of service.
If the parties agree to establish an agreement, STAND recommends that STAND’s definitions be used.
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND applies to receiving a delivery.
It does not describe internal procedures, but focuses on controls that shall and can be done upon receipt of the delivery. The check includes both Distributions Units (DU) and the individual Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
In addition, the sub process describes some of the traceability and main points of any recall or withdrawal, as products receipt may have an active role in any eventual events.
Finally, measurements of service levels are described and how this can be used as an effective tool for establishing a common platform as a basis for measurement, communication and mutual evaluation of performance.
The areas described are:
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has on how physical delivery is to take place, with the emphasis on the controls to be carried out when taking responsibility for the delivery.
The areas described are:
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has, which may be relevant for the preparation and transmission of documentation for a given delivery.
Essentially, this is related to the Despatch Advice and how it is used for Standard pallets, Mixed pallets, Promotional Units and Customer packed pallets, for these forms of distribution:
The areas described are:
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has, which may be relevant for effectuate and prepare delivery to customer.
This includes picking of products, packing and labelling of delivery, ready for pick-up / shipment.
The areas described are:
This sub process consists of the following activities:
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
This sub process consists of the following activities:
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
After all launches, an evaluation will be made. This is carried out in conjunction with the previous product news launches. Below is further information about:
There are defined deadlines for submission of products to Tradesolution for photography and control measurement. This sub process contains the following points:
The process is generic and describes the following points:
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines that STAND has for raw materials, input factors, packaging and finished products traded in the retail trade.
The areas described are:
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has on how pallets are to be built and labelled for optimal transport and storage through the value chain.
The areas described are:
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has, which may be relevant in planning and preparation for a production of a product to be sold in the retail trade.
In addition to the finished product, raw materials and other input factors included in the finished product are also included, as well as packaging, load carriers / pallets used for transportation and storage of the finished product.
The areas described are:
Rammeverket «STAND011 Effektive lanseringer», som ble etablert i 2013, bidrar til å opprettholde varetrykk i butikk, redusere matsvinn og fjerne unødvendige kostnader. (more…)
Standardiseringsutvalget for norsk dagligvarebransje (STAND) feirer 20 år med å lansere en ny informasjonsportal tilrettelagt bransjens stadig mer digitale hverdag. Den nye plattformen skal sikre mer effektiv vareflyt til nytte for forbruker, virksomheter og samfunn, og er unik i internasjonal sammenheng. (more…)
For general questions, contact:
support@stand.no
For supplier specific questions, contact:
Thomas Weihe
Director Value Chain Affairs
Dagligvareleverandørenes forening
thomas.weihe@dlf.no
For retailer specific questions, contact:
Jens Olav Flekke
CEO
Dagligvarehandelens Miljøforum
jof@dmf.no
The process is a generic description of some elements of an ordering process.
It focuses on the interaction between supplier and distributor, or between supplier and retailer.
It does not describe internal activities of the individual player.
Order includes the following sub processes:
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
The process deals with settlement for deliveries. It covers all three forms of distribution:
Settlement is based on the fact that all documentation related to the delivery is to be exchanged in electronic form (EDI).
In addition, the process describes various service level measurements that can be made to document the parties’ performance, from ordering, through delivery, until settlement has taken place.
The measurements are typically associated with:
Settlement includes the following sub processes:
Delivery includes the following sub processes:
Tracking includes the following sub processes:
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines for STAND are:
The guidelines are to be understood as recommendations that actors must bilaterally agree on whether to be followed or not.
STAND Assortment describes recommended activities, processes and deadlines at assortment changes in the different profiles in the various retail chains.
In general, new products should be launched in L1 and L3. Regarding relaunches, minor changes and selected big news, products can also be launched in L2 by agreement with customer
It is a united request from both grocery suppliers, distributors and retail chains that the actors jointly contribute to the most effective processes in implementing assortment changes.
The purpose of the standard is to help maintain the flow of products, avoid empty stock in the value chain and reduce costs, return and obsolescence.
This can be achieved by:
The standard includes the following sub processes:
The deadlines are scarce, and in order to achieve successful assortment range changes, it is very important that the recommended standard timeline and deadlines are followed.
A prerequisite for success is the following guideline for the work:
Get it right the first time – on time
Watch an animation about the main aspects of Assortment here
The process is a generic description of a production process and may vary in different manufacturing companies.
Order of activities described may also differ from how this is done in your business.
Production includes the following sub processes:
Areas affected by and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
This process varies from business to business, and from product to product.
STAND has no guidance on how to do this but has developed guidelines within the following main areas:
The Grocery Suppliers of Norway (DLF Norway) is a non-profit trade association that provides a joint forum for manufacturers and suppliers of branded products.
DLF Norway has over 100 member companies that together cover about 95 % of the turnover of branded goods in the grocery and food service sectors in the Norwegian market.
Our main fields of activity:
Our mission statement includes five main elements:
The Grocery Manufacturers of Norway is a member of the European Brands Association AIM (Association d’Industries de Marque), aim.be.
For more information: www.dlf.no
DMF coordinates overall challenges in the food value chain, linked to sustainability and reduced environmental impact. DMF works with a main focus on logistics, reduced emissions from transport, packaging, carriers, value chain optimization, food safety, return and recycling of packaging. DMF works project-oriented in collaboration with groups where the owners participate with specialists in the individual subject. Ownership and coordination of companies where the grocery chains have joint ownership, such as Grønt Punkt Norge and Norsk Lastebærer Pool (NLP), is a part of DMF’s tasks.
DMF is owned by NorgesGruppen ASA, COOP Norge SA and REMA 1000 Norge AS.
For more information: www.dmf.no
The Standardization Committee for the Norwegian Retail Industry (STAND) represents the retail industry through the trade organizations Norwegian Grocery Sector’s Environmental Forum (DMF) and the industry through the Grocery Suppliers of Norway (DLF).
STAND was established by the industry parties and will prepare and monitor the necessary solutions and measures that contribute to the efficiency, rationalization and optimization of the goods flow, and to ensure that these are implemented. This applies to all conditions that affect the flow of goods (data, databases, information, products / goods, GS1’s standards, packaging, pallets, transport, tracking, etc.).
STAND is established with the purpose of making the value chain to the consumer more efficient and cost effective, and is legally binding only when referring to these guidelines in commercial agreements between supplier and customer.
The guidelines have been prepared for use in Norwegian retail. For use in other channels (convenience, e-commerce, catering), this must be explicitly agreed between the parties.
In its framework, STAND has defined guidelines, recommendations and best practices for how products should be marketed in the distribution chain, and how information on this should be exchanged between the parties.
Central to this is the consideration of the consumer and his expectation for safe food.
The guidelines for tracking, recall and withdrawal do not define food quality requirements, but describe what procedures and processes the industry has established to mitigate any unwanted effects should an incident or crisis occur in a product.
Best practices
The guidelines describe best practices in this area.
By following STAND’s framework, the guidelines will be achievable for all parties involved.
Some important prerequisites for best practice.
By ensuring that a total industry complies with STAND’s framework, consumers’ demands and expectations for safe food are fully met.
Objective of the guidelines
The guidelines are aimed at “Contribute to meet consumers’ expectations for safe products”.
Target Audience:
Products / areas to which the guidelines apply:
Medicines are exempt from the guidelines. Here we refer to separate regulations, not described here.
Certain types of food may be subject to additional regulatory requirements beyond what is described here. An example is the EU’s new tobacco directive (EU 2014/40) which make the requirements for traceability of tobacco products more stringent, but is not described here.
Legislative anchoring of the guidelines
The guidelines are among others based on Norwegian or European regulations on food safety and traceability:
Each party has an obligation to familiarize themselves with the regulations that apply to the products your business sells or are involved in.
The legislation does not impose requirements on how tracking should be performed, and what systems in which tracking information should be recorded. Manual systems may be sufficient as long as the requirements for tracking and tracking information are met.
Routines
The guidelines cover two procedures
Prepare crisis procedures
This is included:
At the heart of the legislation is the duty of each company to carry out a risk analysis of the health risks the products represent and how the company will relate to this in terms of traceability.
The purpose of the analysis is to reduce / prevent risk through
This assumes that the parties are aware of the risks the products may pose and have a preparedness that ensures that they react quickly, correctly and effectively in unwanted incidents. A Risk Analysis should therefore be performed on new products based on an intended relevant incident, so that it can be implemented as quickly as possible should a real incident occur for the product.
The risk analysis consists of three elements that both the government and industry should work on in an equal way:
See more about risk analysis here Design and content of a Risk Analysis.
If unwanted incidents or crises occur, it is important to be well prepared.
Possible scenarios for what might arise should be thought through and how this should be handled.
A Contingency Plan must be prepared that will allow you to cope with the situation quickly, correctly and effectively. The Contingency Plan must be accurate and accessible to all involved at all times.
The Contingency Plan includes:
See more about the Contingency Plan here Design and contents of a Contingency Plan.
The legislation requires that each company must have systems to document which products are purchased from each supplier and which customer has purchased the company’s finished products.
This also includes raw materials and other input that are covered by the legislation.
There is no requirement in the legislation for which type of systems to be used for this.
Businesses can practice more comprehensive tracking systems than the minimum regulatory requirements require, but this is either based on self-imposed requirements or agreements with, and orders from the contracting parties.
Tracking means being able to follow the physical flow of goods. This is often referred to as chain traceability, and assumes that all parties meet the requirements and follow the guidelines for tracking.
Tracking takes into account the legal requirements for all parties to be able to trace their products one step forward and one step back in the value chain.
Tracking one step forward:
This means to the address the products are delivered to.
An invoice system containing information about item number / item name, customer number / customer name and invoice date is sufficient to be able to trace one step forward in the value chain.
If the company is using batch/lot numbers for their products, this should be included in the invoice, despatch advice and the like, or linked directly to the company’s own systems.
Tracking one step backward:
This means the address from which the products are delivered.
The company must keep a log of received products describing which products were purchased from whom and in which quantitiy, and date.
If the addresses for where products are delivered from or delivered to are not in accordance with the legal ownership of the products and the invoice process, this should be agreed separately between the parties.
The main purpose of the tracking information is to lay the groundwork for effective blocking, withdrawal or recall of products.
Central tracking information is:
It is a requirement that the products are labeled to enable tracking.
The marking must be affixed to the product packaging and legible.
The following applies to finished goods traded between supplier and distributor / retailer:
Information to be marked:
Load carrier (for example pallet) shall be marked with SSCC.
The sender must in his system have an overview of which recipient the product was sent to, and also the recipient must have an overview of which sender the product was received from. Both sender and recipient must be identified with GLN.
Sender shall in his system register:
Recipient shall in his system register:
The following applies to raw materials and other inputs:
More about tracking information and how the product can be tracked in the value chain is described here Recommended traceability methods in the value chain.
Alarm / Notification
An incident can occur in all steps of the value chain, at the consumer, retailer, distributor or at the supplier itself. It is important that the supplier is notified as soon as possible.
Notification of an incident shall be given to one alert point at each operator. The alert point should be agreed in advance and always be staffed / available.
The industry has decided that for products registered in the Tradesolution EPD base, Tradesolution ReCall portal should be used for blocking, recall or withdrawal. Access is available at epd@tradesolution.no
For products not registered in the Tradesolution EPD base, a Notification schema for recall, withdrawal or blocking of a product may be used provided that this has been agreed between the supplier and the distributor/wholesaler. Notification schema can be downloaded from Downloads.
Required information to follow an alarm / alert
To identify the scope of the alarm / alert, the product’s GTIN / EPD, best before date, batch / Lot number and SSCC on affected pallets must always be stated. This applies regardless of whether the product is registered in the Tradesolution EPD base or not.
By using the portal, the supplier gets / is secured
The ReCall portal can also be used in situations where you want to withdraw products with quality defects.
Distributors have built their own systems and routines for alerting crisis situations and blocking the products at their distribution warehouses and retailers. This is not part of the ReCall portal.
The following routine applies when registering an incident or crisis
The practical implementation of the routine is described here Routine when registering an incident or crisis, in the Tradesolution ReCall portal.
Conclusion
Through the guidelines, the industry contributes to satisfying consumers’ demands and expectations for safe products, provided that an overall industry complies with the guidelines.
Should an incident or crisis occur, there are routines and tools that, in a simple, fast and secure way, limit incidental damage.
An accurate and limited recall or withdrawal will be possible.
This reduces costs for all parties in the value chain and minimizes potential reputational loss.
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
If an event occurs, the supplier of the product must carry out a risk analysis as quickly as possible.
Risk Analysis
The EU directive on general product safety and food safety / traceability requires manufacturers to take precautions to avoid risk through
This assumes that companies are familiar with the risks the products may have and have preparedness to ensure that they act quickly, correctly and efficiently in case of adverse events.
Risk assessment may also contain items other than food safety. It is especially the risk that products with quality errors will be released to the market, which can have major financial consequences and harm the reputation of the company.
The risk analysis always takes the starting point of an intentional or real event, something unforeseen as occurring and which implies a potential risk.
The degree of risk must be determined (probability x consequence).
Procedures, contingency routines etc. must be prepared to ensure that the event is handled in a fast, correct and efficient manner. This also includes communication measures internally within the company, towards the other part of the value chain, towards authorities and consumers.
The risk analysis consists of three elements that both government and industry should work in a similar way:
1. Risk assessment
The elements of a risk assessment are: Product, type of risk, probability and consequences.
For products that the company distributes and sells in the value chain, the following must be considered:
Compilation and treatment of the above factors gives an assessment of the risk that the company must consider.
The supplier must do a worse-case risk assessment where the supplier considers risk of the product being used in a different way from the purpose.
2. Risk management (withdrawal / recall)
Based on the risk assessment, it must be decided what actions should be done for the product.
Examples of actions:
a) Withdrawal
Withdrawal means removing the products from the value chain distributors / store. The purpose is to prevent products reaching the consumer.
Withdrawal does not imply any kind of notification to the consumer. However, in some cases where the product may have been sold to the consumer, still only a withdrawal in the distribution chain / shop will be carried out. It is therefore assumed that the product does not cause any health hazard and that it is a small quantity.
b) Recall
Recall is the procedure that is implemented when the product may have reached the consumer.
There is a possible high risk that the products may be hazardous to health.
It is crucial for the company that the recall is made known to the public.
According to the Food Law, the actors have a duty to issue a warning.
The company must consider possible alternatives with stakeholders, including authorities, based on regulations, procedures, contingency routines and the like. It must be clearly described how the products are to be handled and who is responsible for this.
Examples of handling:
The parties must clarify who is responsible, for example, the distributor must deliver products to the supplier or the supplier must retrieve products himself at the distributor / retailer.
The supplier must also consider whether it is necessary to inform the authorities of the incident. If the consumer is informed, it is important that the supplier has the capacity to handle any customer requests.
3. Risk Communication
Open and correct information must be communicated to customers (possibly suppliers), the press and authorities.
Distributors have constructed their own systems and routines for alerting crisis situations and blocking of the products against their distribution warehouses and retailers.
This ensures a consistent and effective handling of withdrawal, recall or blocking internally within the companies.
Alarm / Notification
In case of an emergency, notification of recall or withdrawal shall be given to a point of contact agreed by the parties in advance. At the distributors, the alert can be the distributor’s quality department, asset protection department or distribution warehouse (to be agreed between supplier and customer). The point of contact should always be staffed.
Use of the RECALL portal / notification schema
In case of recall / withdrawal notification, Tradesolution’s RECALL portal or Notification schema for recall, withdrawal or blocking of a product shall be used. Notification schema will be phased out over time, at a time decided by STAND.
Here is an animation of how the ReCall portal can be used in case of a recall:
The RECALL-portal / notification schema can also be used in situations that do not present a health risk, but where you want to recall products with a quality issue.
All written notification to distributors / distribution warehouses must be confirmed by oral conversation.
Distributors have constructed their own systems and routines for alerting crisis situations and blocking of the products against their distribution warehouses and retailers. It is recommended that the suppliers take a thorough look at these.
Information to authorities and the media
It is recommended that interested parties (supplier and customer) mutually inform each other before proceeding with information.
It is important that authorities and media are informed at the right time. What information that is required depends on the severity and extent of the event / crisis.
Additional Information
Additional information about the case may include:
Closure of the case
It is important that the event / crisis is terminated when it is under control. The information that should be communicated is:
In cases where the product is to be destroyed, this must be done at an approved disposal facility, and without danger of contamination.
Traceability using pallet labelling and EDI Despatch Advice
The recommended traceability method involves labelling load carriers with GS1 labelling system combined with EDI Despatch Advice (Advance Shipping Notice(ASN)).
For products distributed through the retailer’s distribution warehouses, the industry’s unified guidelines for the identification and Distribution Units (DU) are based on GS1 standards.
To conduct traceability, each actor in the value chain must have a system that can store and process Distribution Units (DU) or logistic units with unique identifiers.
The importance of SSCC as the primary tracking key for deliveries
SSCC is the most important tracking key in the retail value chain. For each pallet identified and marked with SSCC, all products that are on the pallet are linked with full tracking information (GTIN, batch / lot and shelf life). This information is sent to the buyer in an EDI Despatch Advice.
A prerequisite for the tracking information to remain intact is that an SSCC is not reused.
Reusing a SSCC can result in a pallet being stopped at the Goods Reception by the recipient’s IT system, anticipating that the pallet has been received earlier. The recipient must then issue a new SSCC for the pallet, mark it and link the contents of the pallet to the new SSCC.
Since the pallet now has a new SSCC, it can no longer be used as a mutual tracking key in the retail value chain. In case of an incident with a possible recall / withdrawal of products, this could be critical.
STAND has therefore decided the following:
“For trading in Norway, it is a requirement that SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years. This is rooted in the Norwegian Food Safety Law, requiering a minimum traceability of 5 years. This also includes products that are outside the scope of the Norwegian Food Safety Law”.
Traceability at and from sender
Each packaging level (Consumer Units (CU), Stock Keeping Units (SKU), Distribution Units (DU)) has an assigned GTIN and must include a bar code on the label.
On Consumer Unit (CU), GTIN should preferably be labelled with the EAN-13 bar code symbol.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) on the Distribution Unit (DU) must be labelled with an approved bar code symbology and linked to the Distribution Unit’s (DU) unique identification.
Each pallet must be labelled with one GS1-128 bar code pallet label. The label contains a unique identifier (SSCC) which enables a link between the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) on the pallet and the batch / lot number stored in the sender’s IT systems.
If the pallet is split or changed (for example, to one Mixed pallet or Promotional Unit, it shall be identified with a new GS1-128 label and SSCC. Mixed pallets are not labelled with product information.
The product information is attached to the pallet’s SSCC by scanning each Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) when the Distribution Unit (DU) is being assembled.
Once the sender has created the connection between the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU and the Distribution Unit (DU) and secured this, the information can be used to make an EDI Despatch Advice.
The EDI Despatch Advice is then sent from the sender to the recipient of the products. The parties are identified with GLN. This provides a clear and secure identification of the parties and is central to traceability. The Despatch Advice contains all relevant product information (GTIN, batch / lot and shelf life) about the shipment, and that it ties it to each Distribution Unit (DU) using SSCC.
For shipment, the supplier scans all outgoing Distribution Units (DU) and thus has a unified link between the individual product, its associated batches and which customer receives the product. This also enables effective control of the sending of correct products to customers.
Sender sends EDI Despatch Advice to recipient at agreed time.
Traceability at receiver
When the products arrive at the recipient, each pallet will be scanned.
All Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU) information is received in the EDI Despatch Advice. Using the EDI Despatch Advice, the tracking information is taken care of and significantly simplifies the products receipt.
The link to the product information occurs when the recipient scans the SSCC on each Distribution Unit (DU). Here, the recipient connects information about the products (GTIN, batch and shelf life information, against the sender (GLN).
For a Standard pallet all relevant information can be scanned from the Distribution Unit (DU) labels. This ensures that correct products are received at the same time as traceability information can be linked to the individual supplier. This simplifies and ensures the sharing of proper traceability information.
Mixed pallets must be split into the warehouse, and through IT support ensure that accurate and statutory traceability information is safeguarded and connected correctly.
The STAND standards are a set of process-oriented standards which follow the value chain in the grocery industry. This is a big change from when the standards were more task-oriented. All information in the old standards is included in the new ones, but is now structured according to the processes.
All relevant processes at, and between, the brand supplier, the wholesaler and the retailer are described in 7 main processes, with a total of 21 subprocesses.
You will find the standards below here and on the landing page. To find what you are looking for, you can click on the relevant subprocess here, you can go to the relevant main process on the landing page and scroll down the left menu or you can use the search function.
Under Downloads, you will find PDF versions of the main processes, sub-processes and some other useful documents also. Once you are in one of the STAND standards, you can create a PDF of that exact page.
All changes to the standards are listed in attached change log pr 16. December 2019.
This sub process consists of the following activities:
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
EDI – Electronic Data Interchange – is used in the retail industry to exchange commercial documents like Order, Order Receipt, Order Confirmation, Despatch Advice, Invoice and Invoice Receipt.
EDI can be performed in various ways, from fully automated processes both at customer and supplier, to web solutions where information is registered manually.
EDI is used for all distribution types.
Overview of EDI messages and in which processes they are used
Which EDI messages to use will vary with the distribution type.
An overview of this, along with deadlines for when the messages are to be sent, are described in EDI message, type of distribution and deadlines.
Before using EDI, it is necessary to clarify which messages to be used, message formats, exchange methods, electronic message addresses, etc. This documented the EDI Exchange agreement.
This document also specifies other bilateral issues related to the exchange of EDI messages.
To ensure that both parties and all business functions are familiar with all bilateral agreements, it is crucial that the EDI Exchange Agreement is used actively.
How to get started with EDI is described in Implement EDI in the retail trade.
In order to start using EDI, trading documents must be translated into an EDI format.
The following formats are available:
Revisions of the EDI formats, is documented in Change log current version vs. past versions
Send order
An order is sent in the form of an EDI order, and specifies products / services ordered under the terms agreed between seller and buyer.
The order shall fulfil bilateral agreements specified in the EDI exchange agreement.
The order includes buyer and seller, product, quantity, desired delivery date and place of delivery.
The order must be sent in accordance with the agreed order stop time.
Possible corrections that can be made on an order after it has been sent:
Special relationships related to order
The order number should be unique to each order sent from a buyer.
The supplier must reject an order where the order number is received and processed earlier.
For certain products, there is a bilateral agreement on how to split shelf life between the parties. Look to The establishment of bilateral agreements for the assessment of shelf life.
For EXW delivery terms, the rules dictate one order should only include one delivery from one pick-up point to one place of delivery and one desired delivery date.
For delivery terms where the supplier is responsible for transportation, the same applies, except that the order may contain deliveries from multiple locations.
Receipt of orders and return of order receipt
The supplier, if agreed upon in the EDI Exchange Agreement, shall return an EDI order receipt immediately after the order is received.
Order receipt has the function of confirming to the customer that the supplier has received the order. Order receipt contains no information on whether the customer receives the ordered products.
Receive order receipt
Upon reception of order receipt, it provides the customer with an assurance that the order was received by the supplier.
How order receipt is further used by the customer in internal systems is not covered by the guideline.
This sub process consists of the following activities:
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
EDI – Electronic Data Interchange – is used in the retail industry to exchange commercial documents like Order, Order Receipt, Order Confirmation, Despatch Advice, Invoice and Invoice Receipt.
EDI can be performed in various ways, from fully automated processes both at customer and supplier, to web solutions where information is registered manually.
EDI is used for all distribution types.
Overview of EDI messages and in which processes they are used
Which EDI messages to use will vary with the distribution type.
An overview of this, along with deadlines for when the messages are to be sent, are described in EDI message, type of distribution and deadlines.
Before using EDI, it is necessary to clarify which messages to be used, message formats, exchange methods, electronic message addresses, etc. This documented the EDI Exchange agreement.
This document also specifies other bilateral issues related to the exchange of EDI messages.
To ensure that both parties and all business functions are familiar with all bilateral agreements, it is crucial that the EDI Exchange Agreement is used actively.
How to get started with EDI is described in Implement EDI in the retail trade.
In order to start using EDI, trading documents must be translated into an EDI format.
The following formats are available:
Revisions of the EDI formats, is documented in Change log current version vs. past versions
Manage orders and send Order Confirmation
Upon receipt of an order, the supplier shall check that the order complies with the bilateral agreements specified in the EDI Exchange Agreement.
Deadline for sending an Order Confirmation
An Order Confirmation must be sent no later than 3 hours after the order stop time. If not possible to meet the 3-hour deadline, it can be agreed bilaterally what the deadline should be.
For deliveries with order and pick up the same day, bilateral deadlines apply.
Bilateral deadlines must be agreed in writing.
Check for delivery ability
The expected delivery must be confirmed in the Order Confirmation. This means that it must be checked for deliverability.
An Order Confirmation must be sent that confirms what the supplier with a high degree of probability expects will be delivered. The distributor is aware of that there may be a discrepancy between what is confirmed delivered and what is actually delivered. In the case of repeated deviations over time, the parties will enter into a dialogue about how the this can be corrected, in a constructive and flexible way.
It must not be confirmed more than originally ordered without agreement.
When checking for delivery ability, consideration shall be taken regarding any bilateral agreements that allow products to be delivered which, under normal conditions, do not meet the requirements for the distribution of total shelf life between the players. See The establishment of bilateral agreements for the assessment of shelf life
Products that are not covered by a bilateral agreement must have a remaining shelf life that satisfies the requirements for distribution between the players as specified in Table for assessment of shelf life of a product.
Information to be sent for products that are temporarily sold out
If a product is temporarily sold out, it is a request from the distributors that the date for when the product is expected back for sale can be sent in the Order Confirmation. However, this must be agreed bilaterally.
If the supplier does not have systems that can provide this in the Order Confirmation, this information must be exchanged in other bilaterally agreed ways. By exchanging information about when a temporarily out-of-stock product is expected to be available for sale, this can be used actively in the order.
Reservation of quantity for order confirmation
When the order confirmation is sent, the supplier must reserve the quantity that is confirmed delivered to the current order.
Confirmed quantity versus what can be delivered at delivery time
If the order confirmation confirms a quantity that differs from what has been ordered, it is what is stated in the order confirmation that will be included in the delivery to the buyer.
This also applies if the supplier in the meantime will be able to deliver the ordered products.
Requirements for order confirmation
For Crossdock, the following feedback applies in addition to the above:
Receive and process order confirmation
An order confirmation is an end of the procurement process, and the customer should therefore not respond to the order confirmation even though this should have changed according to the order.
The order confirmation number from the supplier must be unique. Recipient shall reject an order confirmation with an order confirmation number received and processed earlier.
How the order confirmation is used by the customer in internal systems is not covered by the STAND guidelines.
Endringslogg
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has, which may be relevant for effectuate and prepare delivery to customer.
This includes picking of products, packing and labelling of delivery, ready for pick-up / shipment.
The areas described are:
Reducing food waste is an overall goal in society. Food waste related to exceeding the limit values of shelf life between the parties in the value chain, constitutes a significant part.
Surveys shows that food waste are significantly reduced if the store and the consumer have a larger part of the total shelf life.
It is therefore a goal that the producer and distributor consume the least amount of available time and that the maximum amount of time is exposed to the consumer.
The grocery industry has defined one Table for allocation of shelf life of a product which regulates the responsibility for and expectations the recipient of products has, linked to shelf life. Online players with b2c sales will be defined as retailers when dividing total shelf life.
In case of minor exceedances of the table’s limit values, participants are expected to seek solutions that provide the lowest possible food waste.
The parties are encouraged to develop performance and collaborate to reduce consumption of shelf life.
Endringslogg
Transport time and delivery frequency should, if possible, be criteria that are taken into account in cases where there is different shelf life on products available at time of shipment.
«Fresher products» are delivered to distributors or customers with long distances of transport / low frequency of delivery.
The risk of food waste is related to the remaining shelf life of a product. To avoid food waste, the players in the grocery industry have agreed to exhibit flexibility in the value chain to handle minor deviations in assessment of shelf life. This is done by establish bilateral agreements.
Bilateral agreements will contribute to more flexible assessment of shelf life, thereby reducing food waste in the value chain (manufacturers, distributors, retailers), considering specific and specific conditions, such as geographical distance to customer / market, and volume of sales.
The grocery industry has defined a table for the assessment of total shelf life, based on a three-division between manufacturer, distributor and retailer / consumer. The table prepared for this applies unless otherwise agreed bilaterally.
For products with short shelf life (42 days or less), conditions such as distance to the market and volume of sales will be decisive for determining optimal assessment of shelf life.
How to establish bilateral agreements
The assessment of shelf life as stated in the table is the basis for the bilateral agreements.
All parties can initiate bilateral agreements based on expected potential for reduction of total food waste.
Description of how the risk will be shared should be included in the agreements.
Measuring consumed shelf life in the value chain is an instrument for securing facts and monitoring development.
Some examples of situations where it may be appropriate to establish bilateral agreements:
One example of reducing waste for products with short shelf life is that a supplier in the eastern part of Norway establish a bilateral agreement with a customer regarding a better date than is stated in the table for deliveries to, for example, northern part of Norway, while for example a customer in the middle and western part of Norway receives deliveries according to the table and with the possibility of deviating dates for smaller volumes for deliveries to the southern and eastern part of Norway.
Products delivered at the beginning of a week is quickly reaching the distributor / distribution centre and the retailer before the weekend and is less prone to simple date deviations. Similarly, it is less appropriate to deliver products with “last day according to STAND” or with date deviations on Fridays, if they will not be received by distributor / distribution centre before Sunday evening / Monday.
In advance of a promotional period, a delivery agreement with a few day date deviations may be applicable, as these products will have higher turnover than usual for the distributor / distribution centre and at retailers. To reduce the risk of increased drop by lower turnover than usual at the distributor / distribution centre and at retailer at the end of the promotional period, a better date should be provided than indicated in the table.
Depending on the product / value chain, it may be advisable to redistribute days. For example:
Product with uneven turnover at retailers and / or a lot of waste at retailers.
Here it may be advisable to redefine days from supplier and / or distributor to retail days.
Product with steady turnover at retailers and / or a small amount of food waste.
Here it may be advisable to redefine days from retail and / or distributor to supplier.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is the unit the retailer buys.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) occurs in various forms, such as carton, reusable box / pallet box, intermediate carton and such.
The most important task of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is to secure Consumer Units (CU) from the time of manufacturing until it is finished exposed in a shop shelf.
The number of Consumer Units (CU) in a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is determined by the manufacturer, preferably in dialogue with the distributor / retail chain.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be adapted to the modular system, see Modular system
for picking and grouping of products can be done as efficient as possible.
Case fill rate shall be calculated. This is described in Case fill rate
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be designed to withstand the strain required in the value chain.
Automatic warehouses require that Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must be packed in a way that it can be lifted, stacked, clamped and handled with different mechanized devices, see Automated warehouse at distributor – greater understanding of the depalletization process.
Design requirements and packaging
When designing a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), it must be based on the modular system.
This means that the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should not be less than 100 x 150 mm and not more than 400 x 600 mm.
Example of best practices
Modular Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is not adapted to the modular system.
The size of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must consider the size of the shelf space for the current product group.
The short side of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should be front where appropriate.
There must be a simple and clear opening guide, preferably with illustration.
The packaging must be opened without using a knife.
When the Consumer Units (CU) is exposed in the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), the least possible of the Stock Keeping Unit’s (SKU) packaging should be visible when exposed in the store shelf.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must not weigh more than 15 kg.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be in recyclable cardboard or plastic.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Lid / plastic film is missing, which may cause Consumer Unit (CU) to fall out during internal transport.
Plastic boxes – all variants – must be considered to work in automated warehouse handling.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be form stable.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is form stable.
Example of best practices
Form stable Stock Keeping Units (SKU) that embraces close to its content and is strong enough to not deform.
Resists load on inbound transport (2 pallets in height), as well as handling through the value chain.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Not form stable. Do not resist strain on inbound transport (2 pallets in height), as well as handling through the value chain.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) that is only wrapped in plastic foil must have a tray / trough below.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) on tray / trough with plastic wrap.
Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must have straight sides.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with straight sides.
Glue quality and amount of glue on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be such that glued surfaces do not loosen.
Example of best practices
Glue quality and amount of glue is such that glued surfaces do not loosen.
Constructed example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Too little glue / too few glue points are included that flap gaps with subsequent stops in automatic warehouse systems.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should be stackable and “ears” should only be used where it is necessary for stability.
Should “ears” be used, these should not exceed 5mm and should not be used in conjunction with intermediate pallet sheets.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should not have loose lid.
The lid must be attached to the tray / trough in such a way that it does not loosen during handling. It is recommended to use glue points or a locking mechanism.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must have a center of gravity relative to the base that allows it to be handled on conveyor belts.
The height / width ratio should be below 1.7 to ensure that the products do not fall under internal transport in an automatic warehouse.
Example of best practices
The ratio height / width is below 1.7.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
The height / width ratio is over 1.7, which means that the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) can fall during internal transport.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) exposure front should not be less than 30 mm, regardless of the chosen solution.
The information on the Consumer Unit (CU) must be visible.
Packaging capacity
During the design of the product and packaging it must be considered that the outer dimensions of the finished Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), tray and otherwise, under the load of the above-mentioned product packaging, due to bulging, is within the margin. In practice, this can be from 0.5 to 1.0 cm.
Optimal transport requires the use of load capacity of the transport systems (weight and height).
Generally, the packaging should be able to carry a similar pallet (2 identical pallets) without any breakage or clamping damage during transport and storage.
Exceptions from this must be specified and labelled on the (Distribution Unit (DU).
Method of calculation of carrying capacity is described in Top load labelling system.
The packaging shall be able to withstand shipping with other products for shipping to the store in a rational way.
In order to achieve the industry’s common goal of efficient flow of products, reduced negative environmental impact, promoted sales and reduced losses, it is important to focus on:
Especially for reusable boxes / pallet boxes
Basically, Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is desired in cardboard, or in combination with plastic.
Reusable boxes are an alternative to Stock Keeping Units (SKU) in corrugated paper but must be agreed bilaterally.
Particularly for Intermediate cartons
The use of Intermediate cartons should be kept as low as possible and must be agreed bilaterally.
Intermediate cartons are accepted in cases where the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) solution is not possible because the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) does not meet the requirements for strength, stability or size and where the use of intermediate pallet sheet on pallet is not possible.
The intermediate carton must be labelled so that it clearly differs from the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and shall not weigh more than 15 kg.
The Distribution Unit (DU) is the unit the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is stacked on / packed in for transport to distributor.
Design of a Standard pallet (Standard pallet and Standard pallet – Low)
A Standard pallet must contain the same product (same GTIN) with a fixed number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU), in a fixed pallet pattern, with equal number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU)on each layer, and where labelling of unique product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) is possible.
The pallet structure shall contain as little excess volume of “air” as possible.
Standard pallet
Maximum pallet height must be 1200 mm incl. pallet. All pallets with total height above standard 1200mm with maximum height of 1250 mm to be agreed bilaterally between supplier and their customers.
Tolerance limit for existing products is 1249 mm.
Standard pallet – Low
Maximum pallet height shall be 600 mm incl. pallet.
Standard pallet – Low is used for low-frequency products and for products with short shelf life.
Principles for the construction of a palletpattern, central in calculation of top load weight, ref Top load labelling system.
When creating a pallet pattern, the following applies:
Types of pallet pattern
When constructing Distribution Units (DU), the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be placed in accordance with a given pallet pattern. These are referred to as bond stacking and column stacking. Pallets can also be built as a combination of bond stacking and column stacking.
Bond Stacking
Bond Stacking means that the units on every other layer are different, thus locking each other to a greater or lesser extent, but it reduces the compressive strength by approx. 40%.
Example of good pallet utilization and stacking with bond stacking, for good stability.
Column Stacking
Column stacking means stacking packages on top of each other without overlapping with other packages. This form of stacking gives maximum strength in terms of pressure load due to that the corners have better roll stiffness than the sides, but the stack gives poor stability without additional use of shrink wrap, strap, ribbon or similar.
Example of column stacking in the lower pallet layers, and bond stacking on the top layer. Combining the different stacking methods achieves good stack strength on the lower layers while the pallet is locked on top.
This is often a good alternative to intermediate pallet sheets.
Use of plastic to secure the pallet through the value chain
Use of intermediate pallet sheets
Intermediate pallet sheets must be minimized and used only if this is necessary to ensure quality and transportability of the pallet.
Intermediate pallet sheets are preferred if the alternative to this is intermediate cartons, “Ears” on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) or use of corner trims.
Where intermediate pallet sheets are used, the following requirements apply:
See also Automated storage at distributor – greater understanding of the depalletization process
Example of intermediate pallet sheet that does not meet quality requirements. The intermediate pallet sheet is a thin paper and is not suitable for automatic warehouse systems
Example of what happens when using “thin paper” intermediate pallet sheets.
The sheet is hanging down in the robot. It blocks for sensors that check that the layer is separated from the rest of the pallet. The robot will stop, and manual error correction must be carried out before the machine can be restarted.
Example of pallet with intermediate pallet sheets, too big – hanging on outside the pallet.
Is not suitable.
Intermediate pallet sheets with holes. Is not suitable.
Endringslogg
It is a prerequisite for maintaining strength, that Stock Keeping Units (SKU) are placed within the edges of the pallet with a small margin.
Devices placed on or outside the edge can cause damage with subsequent reduced carrying capacity / risk of injury.
The pallet area should be utilized as best as possible with products. By following the Modular system optimal use of the pallet is ensured and reduces the risk of the load shifting during transport.
Overhang is not accepted.
This is an animation that show what pallets are valid for distribution.
Requirements specifications can be downloaded here:
Requirements for approved EUR-pallets
Specification for reusable 1/1 plastic pallet
Specification for reusable 1/2 plastic pallet
Requirements specification for reusable 1/3 plastic pallet (from NLP)
Specification for reusable 1/4 plastic pallet
Requirements Specification reusable 1/2 wooden pallet
Requirements specification for 1/3 and 1/2 disposable cardboard pallet
The purpose of a standard for labelling of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU) with subsequent electronic data interchange (EDI) is to:
The basis for this is the labelling of each Distribution Unit (DU) with a unique SSCC.
This code is the main key in the electronic Despatch Advice and is linked to information about which GTIN which the Distribution Unit (DU) consists of, the number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) batch / lot number and shelf life information if applicable.
SSCC is the most important key for traceability of Distributions Units (DU), see Recommended way to track and trace a product in the value chain.
For that reason SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
Recommended way to track and trace a product in the value chain
Efficiency and traceability are achieved primarily through:
To ensure rational product and information flow in the distribution chain, STAND recommends a uniform labelling of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and Distribution Units (DU).
This simplifies the labelling of the manufacturer / supplier, shipment by shipper / freight forwarders and merchandise at distributor / store.
This labelling concept also applies to types of transport units other than pallets.
For fish and fish products, the following applies:
STAND has decided to refer to Norwegian Standard NS17099:2020 “Information technology — Fishery and aquaculture products — Requirements for labelling of distribution units and pallets in the trade of fishery and aquaculture products” for products that fall under this category. This standard replaces todays NS9405: 2014 “Fish and fish products. Requirements for labelling of distribution units and pallets in the trade of fish and fish products», and is valid as from 30. September 2020.
It can be ordered from Standard Norway.
Product information on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), with example of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label
Only product information should be labelled on a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
What information to be labelled depends on the type of product.
Intermediate Cartons shall be labelled as Stock Keeping Units (SKU)
Possible product information which SHALL or CAN be labelled on a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Includes GTIN-8 (8 digits), GTIN-12 (12 digits), GTIN-13 (13 digits) and GTIN-14 (14 digits).
All Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must have their own GTIN.
– For variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU), GTIN-14 with a leading digit 9 should be used.
– For other products, GTIN-13 is recommended.
Name of brand owner
– shall be shown in plain text either on the label or on the packaging.
Product name
– Must be written in plain text on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) product label.
– Must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, – and product description.
– The product description labelled on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be identical to the text in the Despatch Advice and Invoice.
-Product description should also contain a package description: for example, Coffee 12 x 500gr.
Batch / lot number
– A number generated by the manufacturer, used to achieve full traceability of product lot/batches in the value chain
– GS1-128 AI 10 must be used.
Shelf life information (“Best before” date, alternatively “Expiry date”)
– Must be labelled on all Stock Keeping Units which has shelf life printed on the Consumer Unit (CU)
GS1-128 AI 15 shall be used for «Best before date”
GS1-128 AI 17 shall be used for «Expiry date»
Net weight
– GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU).
– Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Supplier’s item number
– can be labelled in plain text.
Table showing what SHALL or CAN be labelled:
Overview of product information that shall or may be labelled on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU): | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
GTIN for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
Name of brand owner | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Shelf life | Must be labelled if shelf life is marekd on the Consumer Unit (CU) |
Must be labelled if shelf life is marekd on the Consumer Unit (CU) |
15, alternatively 17 |
n2 + n6
|
Net weight | Must be labelled for products with variable measures |
Must be labelled for products with variable measures |
310x | n4 + n6
|
Supplier’s item no. | Can be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Example of GS1 Product label for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), for a product with “Best before” date and a fixed weight:
Example of GS1 Product label for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), for a product with “Expiry date” and variable measures:
Type of bar code symbol
When labelling with bar code on Stock Keeping Units (SKU) GS1-128 bar code shall be used.
Identical information
Same information (GS1-128 AI) should only occur once per label.
Size and design of labels
Since the shape and size of the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is highly varied, size and design of the label may also vary.
Quality of labels
It is a prerequisite that the labels are readable throughout the value chain for the entire life span of the unit. Therefore, the quality of GS1-128 bar codes must minimum fulfill print quality with “Grade C” according to standard ISO / IEC 15416.
To achieve “Grade C” when reading, “Grade B” or better is recommended at printing.
Quality of labels and bar codes can be verified at GS1 Norway.
Placement of labels on Stock Keeping Units (SKU)
It is recommended that the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is labelled on two sides.
If labelling can only be done on one side, the label on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be on the same side as one of labels on the pallet (consistent orientation).
By column stacking the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label will be oriented towards one pallet label (either on the short or long side of the pallet).
By bond stacking (like bricks) the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label could be oriented towards the two labels of the pallet. That is, both on the short and the long side of the pallet.
Bar codes
The following recommendations apply to GS1-128 bar code symbols:
Placement of bar code symbols on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Placement of bar code symbols on Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with height less than 50 mm
The standard differs on different types of pallets depending on the content.
Only Standard pallet and Promotional Unit can provide a clear labelling of product information that applies to the entire pallet.
Standard pallet
A Distribution Unit (DU) containing the same product (same GTIN) with fixed count of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and where labelling of unique product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) is possible.
It is recommended that a Standard pallet only contain Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with the same batch / lot number and shelf life date.
There are two different types of Standard pallet:
Standard pallet – Low is used for low-frequency products and for products with short shelf life.
A product can only be used on one type of Standard pallet, either 120 cm height or 60 cm height.
Standard pallet with height 120 cm
Standard pallet with height 60 cm (Standard pallet – Low)
Standard pallet shall be labelled with product and transport information.
Since product information and transportation information are usually known at different times, the practical solution is to label the device with two different labels:
Product information on the GS1 product label for Standard pallet
SSCC (License Plate)
Must be labelled with GS1-128 AI 00 on the GS1 Product label on each Standard pallet in human readable text and in the bar code. The SSCC provides a unique identification of each Distribution Unit (DU). Because of traceability a SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
The bar code containing the SSCC should be the lowest bar code on the label. It is recommended to have a bar code containing only the SSCC and no other AI’s.
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Standard pallet must be labelled with GTIN. This can be done in the following ways:
Product name
The product’s name must be written in human readable text on the Distribution Unit’s (DU) product label. Product name must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, and product description. The product description labelled on the Distributions Unit (DU) must correspond to the text in the Despatch Advice and the invoice.
Batch / lot number.
GS1-128 AI 10 is generated by the manufacturer and used to track the product back to specific production series.
If all Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the pallet have the same batch / lot number, this is indicated on the label in human readable text and bar code. If the pallet contains Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with different batch / lot numbers, batch / lot number is omitted on the label. However, all unique batch / lot numbers must be stated in the electronic Despatch Advice.
Shelf life information
GS1-128 AI 15 should be labelled on all Distribution Units (DU) that contain Consumer Unit (CU) with “Best before date” printed on them.
Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking.
Net weight (in grams)
GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure products. Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Gross weight (in whole kg)
Shall be labelled in human readable text on each Distribution Unit (DU). Gross weight means weight of products, packaging and pallet (load carrier).
Max. top load (in whole kg)
Must be labelled in human readable text.
Distribution Units (DU) that can not be stacked (in transport or storing) are marked with: Cannot be stacked (Kan ikke stables).
Temperature requirements
shall be labelled in human readable text if the product has a temperature requirement.
Product labelling on Standard pallet
Overview of product information that shall or may be labelled on Standard pallet: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
SSCC (License Plate)1) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
GTIN for the Distribution Unit (DU)2) | Can be labelled | Can be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
GTIN for the contained Stock Keeping Units (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 02 | n2 + n14 |
Count of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the DU | Must be marked except when DU is defined as an SKU | Must be marked except when DU is defined as an SKU | 37 | n2 + n..8 |
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number3) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Best before date4) | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | 15 | n2 + n6 |
Net weight | Must be labelled for products of variable measure | Must be labelled for products of variable measure | 3103 | n4 + n6 |
Gross weight | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Max. top load | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled if the product has temperature requirements | Not labelled | ||
1) SSCC shall be indicated on the product label but permitted on both labels provided that the same number is used. 2) Can be used in a case for a transitional period. 3) If Batch / Lot No. is omitted on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), or it is different Batch / Lot No. on the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) this should not be labelled on the Distribution Unit (DU). 4) Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking. |
Example on the GS1 product label for Standard pallet
Promotional Unit
A Unit defined as a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) containing a fixed number of Consumer Unit (CU), intended for display in stores.
Promotional Unit can be 1/1 pallet, 1/2 pallet or 1/3 pallet.
Each Promotional Unit has its own load carrier.
Promotional Unit consisting of 1/2 pallet or 1/3 pallet are placed on a slave pallet. This constitutes a transport unit.
If slave pallet is omitted, this must be agreed bilaterally. For example, for 1/2 pallets with good stability, they can be tied together and exclude the slave pallet. This allows for better use of the pallet by increasing the Promotional Unit, thus allowing more items on the pallet.
Promotional Units are labelled with two levels of SSCC:
Labelling of Promotional Units provides increased traceability in the value chain
Product information on the GS1 product label for Promotional Unit
SSCC (License Plate)
Must be labelled with GS1-128 AI 00 on the GS1 Product label on each Promotional Unit in human readable text and in the bar code. The SSCC provides a unique identification of each Distribution Unit (DU). Because of traceability a SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
The bar code containing the SSCC should be the lowest bar code on the label. It is recommended to have a bar code containing only the SSCC and no other AI’s.
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Promotional Unit must be labelled with GTIN. This can be done in the following ways:
Product name
The product’s name must be written in human readable text on the Distribution Unit’s (DU) product label. Product name must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, and product description. The product description labelled on the Distributions Unit (DU) must correspond to the text in the Despatch Advice and the invoice.
Batch / lot number
GS1-128 AI 10 is generated by the manufacturer and used to track the product back to specific production series.
If all Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the Distribution Unit (DU) have the same batch / lot number, this is indicated on the label in plain text and bar code. If the Distribution Unit (DU) contains Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with different batch / lot numbers, batch / lot number is omitted on the label. However, all unique batch / lot numbers must be stated in the electronic Despatch Advice.
Shelf life information
GS1-128 AI 15 should be labelled on all Distribution Units (DU) that contain Consumer Unit (CU) with “Best before date” printed on them.
Consumer Unit (CU). Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking.
Net weight (in grams)
GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU). Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Gross weight (in whole kg)
shall be labelled in human readable text on each Distribution Unit (DU). Gross weight means weight of products, packaging and pallet (load carrier).
Max. top load (in whole kg)
must be labelled in human readable text.
Distribution Units (DU) that can not be stacked (in transport or storing) are marked with: Cannot be stacked.
Temperature requirements
shall be labelled in human readable text if the product has a temperature requirement.
Product labelling on Promotional Unit
Overview of labelling of product information that may or may not be labelled on Promotional Unit: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
SSCC (License Plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
GTIN for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number1) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Best before date2) | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | 15 | n2 + n6 |
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled if the product has temperature requirements | Not labelled | ||
Supplier’s item number | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
1) If Batch / Lot No. is omitted on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), or it is different Batch / Lot No. on the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) this should not be labelled on the Distribution Unit (DU). 2) Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking. |
Example of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label with SSCC for Promotional Unit
Units where product information can not be entered on their own label
Mixed pallet
Two variants of Mixed pallets are described; with and without intermediate pallet.
On Mixed pallet it is not possible to enter product information on its own label.
Mixed pallet without intermediate pallet:
Pallet consisting of several different products.
Mixed pallet with intermediate pallet:
Pallet consisting of several different products, where each product is stacked in one or more layers, and where each different product is separated by an intermediate pallet.
The choice of type of mixed pallet depends, among other things, on handling costs, transport / environmental costs and storage technology and must be agreed bilaterally between the parties.
Packaging and stability of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be considered when choosing type of a Mixed pallet.
If intermediate pallet(s) are used, it shall always be ordered the amount of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) to complete a layer.
Mixed pallet (both with and without intermediate pallet) is labelled with Standard shipping label for Norwegian grocery sector.
Customer packed pallet
When a supplier assembles products for delivery to the final recipient, the products are packaged and labelled with SSCC at two packaging levels.
Customer packed units are labelled for delivery to the end-user and the Distribution Unit (DU) is labelled for delivery to the transit warehouse.
On Customer packed units it is not possible to enter product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) label.
A customer-packed pallet can be Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers, Customer packed unit – single route, multiple customers, or Customer packed unit – single customer.
This Customer packed units does not need to have its own load carrier and is being loaded on a standardized transport unit (for example, an EUR pallet).
Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers and Customer packed unit – single route, multiple customer is stacked in columns per. end receiver.
Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers is split after products receipt in the transit warehouse, and the individual Customer packed unit is forwarded to the final recipient. A prerequisite is that all Customer packed units located on one Distribution Unit (DU) are destined for the same transit warehouse.
Content of the Standard shipping label for the Norwegian grocery sector.
Overview of labelling of Standard shipping label: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
Sender’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Recipient’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Name, address, etc. for the Crossdocking terminal | Must be labelled when the delivery is via the Crossdocking terminal | Not labelled | ||
Buyer’s reference | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Gross weight | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Max. Top load1) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
SSCC (License Plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
1) Max Top load is omitted for Mixed pallet. |
Example of Standard shipping label for the grocery industry
Transport label for Standard pallet
Standard pallet is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry
A GS1 product label on a Standard pallet requires labeling of SSCC, gross weight, top load weight and temperature requirements.
This information can therefore be omitted from Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
If both product label and transport label are used, SSCC can be labelled on both labels provided that the identical number is used.
Transport label for Promotional Unit
The Distribution Unit (DU) containing one or more Promotional Units is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
The Distribution Unit (DU) is identified and labelled with its own SSCC
If the Promotional Unit a 1/1 pallet, the same labelling of transport label as for Standard pallet is used.
Transport label for Mixed pallet
Mixed pallet (both with and without interlayer pallet) is labelled with Standard shipping label for the Norwegian grocery industry.
If the Mixed pallet is not stackable, information on Top load is omitted.
Transport label for Customer packed pallets
The Customer packed pallet is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
Note in particular:
Recipient’s name, address, etc.
As recipient transit warehouse is given and transit address is given as delivery address. The pallet must be labelled with the transit warehouse’s name, street address, postal code and postal address in human readable text.
Name, address, etc. for the distribution warehouse.
The via-field the distribution warehouse is given. The pallet must be labelled with the distributions warehouse’s name, street address, postal code and postal address in human readable text.
Transport label for Customer packed units
Transport Information.
On this label, a separate field has been created for transport information. This is information that the buyer sends to the supplier in his order and which the supplier must put on the Customer packed unit’s transport label.
Format and content of transport information is agreed between the parties.
Content in transport label for customer packed unit
Transport label for customer packed unit: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
Sender’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
End recipients’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Name, address, etc. for the transit warehouse1) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Transport information2) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Buyer’s reference3) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Gross weight4) | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
SSCC Code (licence plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
1) Transit Warehouse where the pallet is split/cross-docked, is stated in the VIA-field | ||||
2) Transport information is agreed between the parties | ||||
3) Example The Customers Ordering Number | ||||
4) Gross weight is the sum of weight of the products, packaging materials and pallet (load carrier) |
Example of shipping label for Customer packed unit
Placement of labels on pallet
Two types of labels shall be used; label for product information and label for transport information.
Identical information
Same information (GS1-128 AI) shall only appear once on the product and transport label.
This means in practice that the same information can not be repeated on the same label or that the same information may appear on multiple labels on the device (pallet).
The exception is SSCC which is allowed on both labels if it is an identical number used.
Size and design of the labels
The following recommendation applies:
Recommended formats are:
Quality of labels
Bar code label with GS1-128 bar codes shall be done according to GS1 General Specifications Chapter 5.4.
Note in particular:
In its framework, STAND has defined guidelines, recommendations and best practices for how products should be marketed in the distribution chain, and how information on this should be exchanged between the parties.
Central to this is the consideration of the consumer and his expectation for safe food.
The guidelines for tracking, recall and withdrawal do not define food quality requirements, but describe what procedures and processes the industry has established to mitigate any unwanted effects should an incident or crisis occur in a product.
Best practices
The guidelines describe best practices in this area.
By following STAND’s framework, the guidelines will be achievable for all parties involved.
Some important prerequisites for best practice.
By ensuring that a total industry complies with STAND’s framework, consumers’ demands and expectations for safe food are fully met.
Objective of the guidelines
The guidelines are aimed at “Contribute to meet consumers’ expectations for safe products”.
Target Audience:
Products / areas to which the guidelines apply:
Medicines are exempt from the guidelines. Here we refer to separate regulations, not described here.
Certain types of food may be subject to additional regulatory requirements beyond what is described here. An example is the EU’s new tobacco directive (EU 2014/40) which make the requirements for traceability of tobacco products more stringent, but is not described here.
The legislation requires that each company must have systems to document which products are purchased from each supplier and which customer has purchased the company’s finished products.
This also includes raw materials and other input that are covered by the legislation.
There is no requirement in the legislation for which type of systems to be used for this.
Businesses can practice more comprehensive tracking systems than the minimum regulatory requirements require, but this is either based on self-imposed requirements or agreements with, and orders from the contracting parties.
Tracking means being able to follow the physical flow of goods. This is often referred to as chain traceability, and assumes that all parties meet the requirements and follow the guidelines for tracking.
Tracking takes into account the legal requirements for all parties to be able to trace their products one step forward and one step back in the value chain.
Tracking one step forward:
This means to the address the products are delivered to.
An invoice system containing information about item number / item name, customer number / customer name and invoice date is sufficient to be able to trace one step forward in the value chain.
If the company is using batch/lot numbers for their products, this should be included in the invoice, despatch advice and the like, or linked directly to the company’s own systems.
Tracking one step backward:
This means the address from which the products are delivered.
The company must keep a log of received products describing which products were purchased from whom and in which quantitiy, and date.
If the addresses for where products are delivered from or delivered to are not in accordance with the legal ownership of the products and the invoice process, this should be agreed separately between the parties.
The main purpose of the tracking information is to lay the groundwork for effective blocking, withdrawal or recall of products.
Central tracking information is:
It is a requirement that the products are labeled to enable tracking.
The marking must be affixed to the product packaging and legible.
The following applies to finished goods traded between supplier and distributor / retailer:
Information to be marked:
Load carrier (for example pallet) shall be marked with SSCC.
The sender must in his system have an overview of which recipient the product was sent to, and also the recipient must have an overview of which sender the product was received from. Both sender and recipient must be identified with GLN.
Sender shall in his system register:
Recipient shall in his system register:
The following applies to raw materials and other inputs:
More about tracking information and how the product can be tracked in the value chain is described here Recommended traceability methods in the value chain.
The responsibility for the products is transferred when the seller has made the product available for the buyer in accordance with the agreement.
Unless otherwise agreed, the buyer is responsible for loading of products.
The buyer is liable for any risk of loss or damage to the products from the time the products is placed at the buyer’s disposal.
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has, which may be relevant for the preparation and transmission of documentation for a given delivery.
Essentially, this is related to the Despatch Advice and how it is used for Standard pallets, Mixed pallets, Promotional Units and Customer packed pallets, for these forms of distribution:
The areas described are:
EDI – Electronic Data Interchange – is used in the retail industry to exchange commercial documents like Order, Order Receipt, Order Confirmation, Despatch Advice, Invoice and Invoice Receipt.
EDI can be performed in various ways, from fully automated processes both at customer and supplier, to web solutions where information is registered manually.
EDI is used for all distribution types.
Overview of EDI messages and in which processes they are used
Which EDI messages to use will vary with the distribution type.
An overview of this, along with deadlines for when the messages are to be sent, are described in EDI message, type of distribution and deadlines.
Before using EDI, it is necessary to clarify which messages to be used, message formats, exchange methods, electronic message addresses, etc. This documented the EDI Exchange agreement.
This document also specifies other bilateral issues related to the exchange of EDI messages.
To ensure that both parties and all business functions are familiar with all bilateral agreements, it is crucial that the EDI Exchange Agreement is used actively.
How to get started with EDI is described in Implement EDI in the retail trade.
In order to start using EDI, trading documents must be translated into an EDI format.
The following formats are available:
Revisions of the EDI formats, is documented in Change log current version vs. past versions
Develop documentation
STAND makes no direct claim to any documentation that will accompany or document a delivery, as well as the fact that the EDI Despatch Advice is always to be used for distributors or Crossdock deliveries.
For deliveries direct to retailer, there should bilaterally be agreed if the EDI Despatch Advice is to be sent.
It is nevertheless understood that there may be a need for documentation beyond this, such as consignment, transport documents or other accompanying documentation.
In certain types of deliveries or in given situations there may also be legal requirements for which documentation that shall follow the shipment.
The parties must bilaterally agree what documentation is required in addition to the EDI Despatch Advice.
Send Despatch Advice
When the supplier has picked, labelled and clarified delivery for pick-up (at delivery condition Ex Works) at the agreed time and place, the Despatch Advice shall be sent in accordance with deadline.
One Despatch Advice should only include one order. Exceptions to this may occur at Crossdock.
The Despatch Advice should refer to previous orders.
Despatch Advice shall contain only the products and the quantity delivered.
Exceptions to this may occur at Crossdock, but this must be agreed bilaterally.
Distribution Units (DU) must be identified with SSCC (Serial Shipping Container Code) and this information must be sent in the Despatch Advice.
SSCC is the most important tracking key and associates the individual products in the delivery up to which pallet products are located.
The Despatch Advice is shipped with different details of information, depending on which pallet type the delivery consists of or what has been agreed bilaterally.
Normally, what applies:
For Promotional Units, the following formulation applies from STAND:
«The grocery industry has a common goal that all deliveries should be traceable as far as possible through the entire value chain. For Promotional Units, this is achieved only by labelling each Promotion Unit with a unique identifier (SSCC) and include it in the Despatch Advice sent to the retail chain. This ensures traceability all the way to the store.
Today, it is variable practices in suppliers on which level of Despatch Advice is used on Promotional Units. The goal is that the industry part will prepare the systems for sending and using Level 4 of Despatch Advice on Promotional Units before the end of 2019 ».
For those who use TakeCargo for transport, the following applies:
Despatch Advice can also be sent to the load carrier (eg NLP) with information about the number of pallets of each pallet type included in the pallet exchange scheme.
This information enables automatic pallet balance update between customer and supplier.
The use of a Despatch Advice for the update of cargo information must be agreed with a cargo carrier before it is taken into service.
The Despatch Advice can also indicate the number of pallet places the delivery requires in transport. This information allows the distributor at Ex Works to calculate the transport needs, thereby sending the correct size of the lorry when the delivery is to be picked up.
Receive Despatch Advice
Upon receipt of a Despatch Advice, the customer can plan and prepare products receipt.
The use of Despatch Advice simplifies products receipt and contains, in addition to other information, traceability information on the products.
The Despatch Advice number must be unique to each Despatch Advice sent from the supplier.
The buyer shall reject a Despatch Advice with a number that has been received and processed earlier.
How the Despatch Advice is used by the customer in internal systems is not covered by STAND guidelines.
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has on how physical delivery is to take place, with the emphasis on the controls to be carried out when taking responsibility for the delivery.
The areas described are:
The responsibility for the products is transferred when the seller has made the product available for the buyer in accordance with the agreement.
Unless otherwise agreed, the buyer is responsible for loading of products.
The buyer is liable for any risk of loss or damage to the products from the time the products is placed at the buyer’s disposal.
The buyer or the party acting on behalf of the buyer shall, when the responsibility for the products has been transferred, control the quantity and possible damage to a reasonable extent.
The buyer shall make a complaint about errors or defects in the products within a reasonable time after the error or defect is discovered or should have been discovered.
Seller who claims that the complaint deadline has been exceeded must do so immediately after the complaint has been received.
The buyer may require replacement, redeployment, price reduction, etc. pursuant to the provisions of the applicable law (Kjøpsloven).
All errors and defects must be based on the things that the seller is responsible for.
Content of the Standard shipping label for the Norwegian grocery sector.
Overview of labelling of Standard shipping label: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
Sender’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Recipient’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Name, address, etc. for the Crossdocking terminal | Must be labelled when the delivery is via the Crossdocking terminal | Not labelled | ||
Buyer’s reference | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Gross weight | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Max. Top load1) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
SSCC (License Plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
1) Max Top load is omitted for Mixed pallet. |
Example of Standard shipping label for the grocery industry
Transport label for Standard pallet
Standard pallet is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry
A GS1 product label on a Standard pallet requires labeling of SSCC, gross weight, top load weight and temperature requirements.
This information can therefore be omitted from Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
If both product label and transport label are used, SSCC can be labelled on both labels provided that the identical number is used.
Transport label for Promotional Unit
The Distribution Unit (DU) containing one or more Promotional Units is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
The Distribution Unit (DU) is identified and labelled with its own SSCC
If the Promotional Unit a 1/1 pallet, the same labelling of transport label as for Standard pallet is used.
Transport label for Mixed pallet
Mixed pallet (both with and without interlayer pallet) is labelled with Standard shipping label for the Norwegian grocery industry.
If the Mixed pallet is not stackable, information on Top load is omitted.
Transport label for Customer packed pallets
The Customer packed pallet is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
Note in particular:
Recipient’s name, address, etc.
As recipient transit warehouse is given and transit address is given as delivery address. The pallet must be labelled with the transit warehouse’s name, street address, postal code and postal address in human readable text.
Name, address, etc. for the distribution warehouse.
The via-field the distribution warehouse is given. The pallet must be labelled with the distributions warehouse’s name, street address, postal code and postal address in human readable text.
Transport label for Customer packed units
Transport Information.
On this label, a separate field has been created for transport information. This is information that the buyer sends to the supplier in his order and which the supplier must put on the Customer packed unit’s transport label.
Format and content of transport information is agreed between the parties.
Content in transport label for customer packed unit
Transport label for customer packed unit: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
Sender’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
End recipients’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Name, address, etc. for the transit warehouse1) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Transport information2) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Buyer’s reference3) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Gross weight4) | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
SSCC Code (licence plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
1) Transit Warehouse where the pallet is split/cross-docked, is stated in the VIA-field | ||||
2) Transport information is agreed between the parties | ||||
3) Example The Customers Ordering Number | ||||
4) Gross weight is the sum of weight of the products, packaging materials and pallet (load carrier) |
Example of shipping label for Customer packed unit
Placement of labels on pallet
Two types of labels shall be used; label for product information and label for transport information.
Identical information
Same information (GS1-128 AI) shall only appear once on the product and transport label.
This means in practice that the same information can not be repeated on the same label or that the same information may appear on multiple labels on the device (pallet).
The exception is SSCC which is allowed on both labels if it is an identical number used.
Size and design of the labels
The following recommendation applies:
Recommended formats are:
Quality of labels
This is an animation that show what pallets are valid for distribution.
Requirements specifications can be downloaded here:
Requirements for approved EUR-pallets
Specification for reusable 1/1 plastic pallet
Specification for reusable 1/2 plastic pallet
Requirements specification for reusable 1/3 plastic pallet (from NLP)
Specification for reusable 1/4 plastic pallet
Requirements Specification reusable 1/2 wooden pallet
Requirements specification for 1/3 and 1/2 disposable cardboard pallet
The Distribution Unit (DU) is the unit the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is stacked on / packed in for transport to distributor.
Design of a Standard pallet (Standard pallet and Standard pallet – Low)
A Standard pallet must contain the same product (same GTIN) with a fixed number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU), in a fixed pallet pattern, with equal number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU)on each layer, and where labelling of unique product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) is possible.
The pallet structure shall contain as little excess volume of “air” as possible.
Standard pallet
Maximum pallet height must be 1200 mm incl. pallet. All pallets with total height above standard 1200mm with maximum height of 1250 mm to be agreed bilaterally between supplier and their customers.
Tolerance limit for existing products is 1249 mm.
Standard pallet – Low
Maximum pallet height shall be 600 mm incl. pallet.
Standard pallet – Low is used for low-frequency products and for products with short shelf life.
Principles for the construction of a palletpattern, central in calculation of top load weight, ref Top load labelling system.
When creating a pallet pattern, the following applies:
Types of pallet pattern
When constructing Distribution Units (DU), the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be placed in accordance with a given pallet pattern. These are referred to as bond stacking and column stacking. Pallets can also be built as a combination of bond stacking and column stacking.
Bond Stacking
Bond Stacking means that the units on every other layer are different, thus locking each other to a greater or lesser extent, but it reduces the compressive strength by approx. 40%.
Example of good pallet utilization and stacking with bond stacking, for good stability.
Column Stacking
Column stacking means stacking packages on top of each other without overlapping with other packages. This form of stacking gives maximum strength in terms of pressure load due to that the corners have better roll stiffness than the sides, but the stack gives poor stability without additional use of shrink wrap, strap, ribbon or similar.
Example of column stacking in the lower pallet layers, and bond stacking on the top layer. Combining the different stacking methods achieves good stack strength on the lower layers while the pallet is locked on top.
This is often a good alternative to intermediate pallet sheets.
Use of plastic to secure the pallet through the value chain
Use of intermediate pallet sheets
Intermediate pallet sheets must be minimized and used only if this is necessary to ensure quality and transportability of the pallet.
Intermediate pallet sheets are preferred if the alternative to this is intermediate cartons, “Ears” on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) or use of corner trims.
Where intermediate pallet sheets are used, the following requirements apply:
See also Automated storage at distributor – greater understanding of the depalletization process
Example of intermediate pallet sheet that does not meet quality requirements. The intermediate pallet sheet is a thin paper and is not suitable for automatic warehouse systems
Example of what happens when using “thin paper” intermediate pallet sheets.
The sheet is hanging down in the robot. It blocks for sensors that check that the layer is separated from the rest of the pallet. The robot will stop, and manual error correction must be carried out before the machine can be restarted.
Example of pallet with intermediate pallet sheets, too big – hanging on outside the pallet.
Is not suitable.
Intermediate pallet sheets with holes. Is not suitable.
Endringslogg
It is a prerequisite for maintaining strength, that Stock Keeping Units (SKU) are placed within the edges of the pallet with a small margin.
Devices placed on or outside the edge can cause damage with subsequent reduced carrying capacity / risk of injury.
The pallet area should be utilized as best as possible with products. By following the Modular system optimal use of the pallet is ensured and reduces the risk of the load shifting during transport.
Overhang is not accepted.
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND applies to receiving a delivery.
It does not describe internal procedures, but focuses on controls that shall and can be done upon receipt of the delivery. The check includes both Distributions Units (DU) and the individual Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
In addition, the sub process describes some of the traceability and main points of any recall or withdrawal, as products receipt may have an active role in any eventual events.
Finally, measurements of service levels are described and how this can be used as an effective tool for establishing a common platform as a basis for measurement, communication and mutual evaluation of performance.
The areas described are:
The responsibility for the products is transferred when the seller has made the product available for the buyer in accordance with the agreement.
Unless otherwise agreed, the buyer is responsible for loading of products.
The buyer is liable for any risk of loss or damage to the products from the time the products is placed at the buyer’s disposal.
The buyer or the party acting on behalf of the buyer shall, when the responsibility for the products has been transferred, control the quantity and possible damage to a reasonable extent.
This is an animation that show what pallets are valid for distribution.
Requirements specifications can be downloaded here:
Requirements for approved EUR-pallets
Specification for reusable 1/1 plastic pallet
Specification for reusable 1/2 plastic pallet
Requirements specification for reusable 1/3 plastic pallet (from NLP)
Specification for reusable 1/4 plastic pallet
Requirements Specification reusable 1/2 wooden pallet
Requirements specification for 1/3 and 1/2 disposable cardboard pallet
Reducing food waste is an overall goal in society. Food waste related to exceeding the limit values of shelf life between the parties in the value chain, constitutes a significant part.
Surveys shows that food waste are significantly reduced if the store and the consumer have a larger part of the total shelf life.
It is therefore a goal that the producer and distributor consume the least amount of available time and that the maximum amount of time is exposed to the consumer.
The grocery industry has defined one Table for allocation of shelf life of a product which regulates the responsibility for and expectations the recipient of products has, linked to shelf life. Online players with b2c sales will be defined as retailers when dividing total shelf life.
In case of minor exceedances of the table’s limit values, participants are expected to seek solutions that provide the lowest possible food waste.
The parties are encouraged to develop performance and collaborate to reduce consumption of shelf life.
Endringslogg
The risk of food waste is related to the remaining shelf life of a product. To avoid food waste, the players in the grocery industry have agreed to exhibit flexibility in the value chain to handle minor deviations in assessment of shelf life. This is done by establish bilateral agreements.
Bilateral agreements will contribute to more flexible assessment of shelf life, thereby reducing food waste in the value chain (manufacturers, distributors, retailers), considering specific and specific conditions, such as geographical distance to customer / market, and volume of sales.
The grocery industry has defined a table for the assessment of total shelf life, based on a three-division between manufacturer, distributor and retailer / consumer. The table prepared for this applies unless otherwise agreed bilaterally.
For products with short shelf life (42 days or less), conditions such as distance to the market and volume of sales will be decisive for determining optimal assessment of shelf life.
How to establish bilateral agreements
The assessment of shelf life as stated in the table is the basis for the bilateral agreements.
All parties can initiate bilateral agreements based on expected potential for reduction of total food waste.
Description of how the risk will be shared should be included in the agreements.
Measuring consumed shelf life in the value chain is an instrument for securing facts and monitoring development.
Some examples of situations where it may be appropriate to establish bilateral agreements:
One example of reducing waste for products with short shelf life is that a supplier in the eastern part of Norway establish a bilateral agreement with a customer regarding a better date than is stated in the table for deliveries to, for example, northern part of Norway, while for example a customer in the middle and western part of Norway receives deliveries according to the table and with the possibility of deviating dates for smaller volumes for deliveries to the southern and eastern part of Norway.
Products delivered at the beginning of a week is quickly reaching the distributor / distribution centre and the retailer before the weekend and is less prone to simple date deviations. Similarly, it is less appropriate to deliver products with “last day according to STAND” or with date deviations on Fridays, if they will not be received by distributor / distribution centre before Sunday evening / Monday.
In advance of a promotional period, a delivery agreement with a few day date deviations may be applicable, as these products will have higher turnover than usual for the distributor / distribution centre and at retailers. To reduce the risk of increased drop by lower turnover than usual at the distributor / distribution centre and at retailer at the end of the promotional period, a better date should be provided than indicated in the table.
Depending on the product / value chain, it may be advisable to redistribute days. For example:
Product with uneven turnover at retailers and / or a lot of waste at retailers.
Here it may be advisable to redefine days from supplier and / or distributor to retail days.
Product with steady turnover at retailers and / or a small amount of food waste.
Here it may be advisable to redefine days from retail and / or distributor to supplier.
Transport time and delivery frequency should, if possible, be criteria that are taken into account in cases where there is different shelf life on products available at time of shipment.
«Fresher products» are delivered to distributors or customers with long distances of transport / low frequency of delivery.
The buyer shall make a complaint about errors or defects in the products within a reasonable time after the error or defect is discovered or should have been discovered.
Seller who claims that the complaint deadline has been exceeded must do so immediately after the complaint has been received.
The buyer may require replacement, redeployment, price reduction, etc. pursuant to the provisions of the applicable law (Kjøpsloven).
All errors and defects must be based on the things that the seller is responsible for.
Return of saleable, undamaged products is usually not accepted.
However, the parties may make agreements for return of products for example in connection with:
The purpose of a standard for labelling of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU) with subsequent electronic data interchange (EDI) is to:
The basis for this is the labelling of each Distribution Unit (DU) with a unique SSCC.
This code is the main key in the electronic Despatch Advice and is linked to information about which GTIN which the Distribution Unit (DU) consists of, the number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) batch / lot number and shelf life information if applicable.
SSCC is the most important key for traceability of Distributions Units (DU), see Recommended way to track and trace a product in the value chain.
For that reason SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
Recommended way to track and trace a product in the value chain
Efficiency and traceability are achieved primarily through:
To ensure rational product and information flow in the distribution chain, STAND recommends a uniform labelling of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and Distribution Units (DU).
This simplifies the labelling of the manufacturer / supplier, shipment by shipper / freight forwarders and merchandise at distributor / store.
This labelling concept also applies to types of transport units other than pallets.
For fish and fish products, the following applies:
STAND has decided to refer to Norwegian Standard NS17099:2020 “Information technology — Fishery and aquaculture products — Requirements for labelling of distribution units and pallets in the trade of fishery and aquaculture products” for products that fall under this category. This standard replaces todays NS9405: 2014 “Fish and fish products. Requirements for labelling of distribution units and pallets in the trade of fish and fish products», and is valid as from 30. September 2020.
It can be ordered from Standard Norway.
Product information on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), with example of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label
Only product information should be labelled on a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
What information to be labelled depends on the type of product.
Intermediate Cartons shall be labelled as Stock Keeping Units (SKU)
Possible product information which SHALL or CAN be labelled on a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Includes GTIN-8 (8 digits), GTIN-12 (12 digits), GTIN-13 (13 digits) and GTIN-14 (14 digits).
All Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must have their own GTIN.
– For variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU), GTIN-14 with a leading digit 9 should be used.
– For other products, GTIN-13 is recommended.
Name of brand owner
– shall be shown in plain text either on the label or on the packaging.
Product name
– Must be written in plain text on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) product label.
– Must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, – and product description.
– The product description labelled on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be identical to the text in the Despatch Advice and Invoice.
-Product description should also contain a package description: for example, Coffee 12 x 500gr.
Batch / lot number
– A number generated by the manufacturer, used to achieve full traceability of product lot/batches in the value chain
– GS1-128 AI 10 must be used.
Shelf life information (“Best before” date, alternatively “Expiry date”)
– Must be labelled on all Stock Keeping Units which has shelf life printed on the Consumer Unit (CU)
GS1-128 AI 15 shall be used for «Best before date”
GS1-128 AI 17 shall be used for «Expiry date»
Net weight
– GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU).
– Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Supplier’s item number
– can be labelled in plain text.
Table showing what SHALL or CAN be labelled:
Overview of product information that shall or may be labelled on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU): | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
GTIN for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
Name of brand owner | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Shelf life | Must be labelled if shelf life is marekd on the Consumer Unit (CU) |
Must be labelled if shelf life is marekd on the Consumer Unit (CU) |
15, alternatively 17 |
n2 + n6
|
Net weight | Must be labelled for products with variable measures |
Must be labelled for products with variable measures |
310x | n4 + n6
|
Supplier’s item no. | Can be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Example of GS1 Product label for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), for a product with “Best before” date and a fixed weight:
Example of GS1 Product label for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), for a product with “Expiry date” and variable measures:
Type of bar code symbol
When labelling with bar code on Stock Keeping Units (SKU) GS1-128 bar code shall be used.
Identical information
Same information (GS1-128 AI) should only occur once per label.
Size and design of labels
Since the shape and size of the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is highly varied, size and design of the label may also vary.
Quality of labels
It is a prerequisite that the labels are readable throughout the value chain for the entire life span of the unit. Therefore, the quality of GS1-128 bar codes must minimum fulfill print quality with “Grade C” according to standard ISO / IEC 15416.
To achieve “Grade C” when reading, “Grade B” or better is recommended at printing.
Quality of labels and bar codes can be verified at GS1 Norway.
Placement of labels on Stock Keeping Units (SKU)
It is recommended that the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is labelled on two sides.
If labelling can only be done on one side, the label on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be on the same side as one of labels on the pallet (consistent orientation).
By column stacking the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label will be oriented towards one pallet label (either on the short or long side of the pallet).
By bond stacking (like bricks) the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label could be oriented towards the two labels of the pallet. That is, both on the short and the long side of the pallet.
Bar codes
The following recommendations apply to GS1-128 bar code symbols:
Placement of bar code symbols on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Placement of bar code symbols on Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with height less than 50 mm
Content of the Standard shipping label for the Norwegian grocery sector.
Overview of labelling of Standard shipping label: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
Sender’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Recipient’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Name, address, etc. for the Crossdocking terminal | Must be labelled when the delivery is via the Crossdocking terminal | Not labelled | ||
Buyer’s reference | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Gross weight | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Max. Top load1) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
SSCC (License Plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
1) Max Top load is omitted for Mixed pallet. |
Example of Standard shipping label for the grocery industry
Transport label for Standard pallet
Standard pallet is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry
A GS1 product label on a Standard pallet requires labeling of SSCC, gross weight, top load weight and temperature requirements.
This information can therefore be omitted from Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
If both product label and transport label are used, SSCC can be labelled on both labels provided that the identical number is used.
Transport label for Promotional Unit
The Distribution Unit (DU) containing one or more Promotional Units is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
The Distribution Unit (DU) is identified and labelled with its own SSCC
If the Promotional Unit a 1/1 pallet, the same labelling of transport label as for Standard pallet is used.
Transport label for Mixed pallet
Mixed pallet (both with and without interlayer pallet) is labelled with Standard shipping label for the Norwegian grocery industry.
If the Mixed pallet is not stackable, information on Top load is omitted.
Transport label for Customer packed pallets
The Customer packed pallet is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
Note in particular:
Recipient’s name, address, etc.
As recipient transit warehouse is given and transit address is given as delivery address. The pallet must be labelled with the transit warehouse’s name, street address, postal code and postal address in human readable text.
Name, address, etc. for the distribution warehouse.
The via-field the distribution warehouse is given. The pallet must be labelled with the distributions warehouse’s name, street address, postal code and postal address in human readable text.
Transport label for Customer packed units
Transport Information.
On this label, a separate field has been created for transport information. This is information that the buyer sends to the supplier in his order and which the supplier must put on the Customer packed unit’s transport label.
Format and content of transport information is agreed between the parties.
Content in transport label for customer packed unit
Transport label for customer packed unit: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
Sender’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
End recipients’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Name, address, etc. for the transit warehouse1) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Transport information2) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Buyer’s reference3) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Gross weight4) | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
SSCC Code (licence plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
1) Transit Warehouse where the pallet is split/cross-docked, is stated in the VIA-field | ||||
2) Transport information is agreed between the parties | ||||
3) Example The Customers Ordering Number | ||||
4) Gross weight is the sum of weight of the products, packaging materials and pallet (load carrier) |
Example of shipping label for Customer packed unit
The standard differs on different types of pallets depending on the content.
Only Standard pallet and Promotional Unit can provide a clear labelling of product information that applies to the entire pallet.
Standard pallet
A Distribution Unit (DU) containing the same product (same GTIN) with fixed count of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and where labelling of unique product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) is possible.
It is recommended that a Standard pallet only contain Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with the same batch / lot number and shelf life date.
There are two different types of Standard pallet:
Standard pallet – Low is used for low-frequency products and for products with short shelf life.
A product can only be used on one type of Standard pallet, either 120 cm height or 60 cm height.
Standard pallet with height 120 cm
Standard pallet with height 60 cm (Standard pallet – Low)
Standard pallet shall be labelled with product and transport information.
Since product information and transportation information are usually known at different times, the practical solution is to label the device with two different labels:
Product information on the GS1 product label for Standard pallet
SSCC (License Plate)
Must be labelled with GS1-128 AI 00 on the GS1 Product label on each Standard pallet in human readable text and in the bar code. The SSCC provides a unique identification of each Distribution Unit (DU). Because of traceability a SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
The bar code containing the SSCC should be the lowest bar code on the label. It is recommended to have a bar code containing only the SSCC and no other AI’s.
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Standard pallet must be labelled with GTIN. This can be done in the following ways:
Product name
The product’s name must be written in human readable text on the Distribution Unit’s (DU) product label. Product name must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, and product description. The product description labelled on the Distributions Unit (DU) must correspond to the text in the Despatch Advice and the invoice.
Batch / lot number.
GS1-128 AI 10 is generated by the manufacturer and used to track the product back to specific production series.
If all Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the pallet have the same batch / lot number, this is indicated on the label in human readable text and bar code. If the pallet contains Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with different batch / lot numbers, batch / lot number is omitted on the label. However, all unique batch / lot numbers must be stated in the electronic Despatch Advice.
Shelf life information
GS1-128 AI 15 should be labelled on all Distribution Units (DU) that contain Consumer Unit (CU) with “Best before date” printed on them.
Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking.
Net weight (in grams)
GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure products. Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Gross weight (in whole kg)
Shall be labelled in human readable text on each Distribution Unit (DU). Gross weight means weight of products, packaging and pallet (load carrier).
Max. top load (in whole kg)
Must be labelled in human readable text.
Distribution Units (DU) that can not be stacked (in transport or storing) are marked with: Cannot be stacked (Kan ikke stables).
Temperature requirements
shall be labelled in human readable text if the product has a temperature requirement.
Product labelling on Standard pallet
Overview of product information that shall or may be labelled on Standard pallet: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
SSCC (License Plate)1) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
GTIN for the Distribution Unit (DU)2) | Can be labelled | Can be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
GTIN for the contained Stock Keeping Units (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 02 | n2 + n14 |
Count of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the DU | Must be marked except when DU is defined as an SKU | Must be marked except when DU is defined as an SKU | 37 | n2 + n..8 |
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number3) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Best before date4) | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | 15 | n2 + n6 |
Net weight | Must be labelled for products of variable measure | Must be labelled for products of variable measure | 3103 | n4 + n6 |
Gross weight | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Max. top load | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled if the product has temperature requirements | Not labelled | ||
1) SSCC shall be indicated on the product label but permitted on both labels provided that the same number is used. 2) Can be used in a case for a transitional period. 3) If Batch / Lot No. is omitted on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), or it is different Batch / Lot No. on the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) this should not be labelled on the Distribution Unit (DU). 4) Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking. |
Example on the GS1 product label for Standard pallet
Promotional Unit
A Unit defined as a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) containing a fixed number of Consumer Unit (CU), intended for display in stores.
Promotional Unit can be 1/1 pallet, 1/2 pallet or 1/3 pallet.
Each Promotional Unit has its own load carrier.
Promotional Unit consisting of 1/2 pallet or 1/3 pallet are placed on a slave pallet. This constitutes a transport unit.
If slave pallet is omitted, this must be agreed bilaterally. For example, for 1/2 pallets with good stability, they can be tied together and exclude the slave pallet. This allows for better use of the pallet by increasing the Promotional Unit, thus allowing more items on the pallet.
Promotional Units are labelled with two levels of SSCC:
Labelling of Promotional Units provides increased traceability in the value chain
Product information on the GS1 product label for Promotional Unit
SSCC (License Plate)
Must be labelled with GS1-128 AI 00 on the GS1 Product label on each Promotional Unit in human readable text and in the bar code. The SSCC provides a unique identification of each Distribution Unit (DU). Because of traceability a SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
The bar code containing the SSCC should be the lowest bar code on the label. It is recommended to have a bar code containing only the SSCC and no other AI’s.
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Promotional Unit must be labelled with GTIN. This can be done in the following ways:
Product name
The product’s name must be written in human readable text on the Distribution Unit’s (DU) product label. Product name must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, and product description. The product description labelled on the Distributions Unit (DU) must correspond to the text in the Despatch Advice and the invoice.
Batch / lot number
GS1-128 AI 10 is generated by the manufacturer and used to track the product back to specific production series.
If all Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the Distribution Unit (DU) have the same batch / lot number, this is indicated on the label in plain text and bar code. If the Distribution Unit (DU) contains Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with different batch / lot numbers, batch / lot number is omitted on the label. However, all unique batch / lot numbers must be stated in the electronic Despatch Advice.
Shelf life information
GS1-128 AI 15 should be labelled on all Distribution Units (DU) that contain Consumer Unit (CU) with “Best before date” printed on them.
Consumer Unit (CU). Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking.
Net weight (in grams)
GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU). Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Gross weight (in whole kg)
shall be labelled in human readable text on each Distribution Unit (DU). Gross weight means weight of products, packaging and pallet (load carrier).
Max. top load (in whole kg)
must be labelled in human readable text.
Distribution Units (DU) that can not be stacked (in transport or storing) are marked with: Cannot be stacked.
Temperature requirements
shall be labelled in human readable text if the product has a temperature requirement.
Product labelling on Promotional Unit
Overview of labelling of product information that may or may not be labelled on Promotional Unit: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
SSCC (License Plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
GTIN for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number1) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Best before date2) | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | 15 | n2 + n6 |
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled if the product has temperature requirements | Not labelled | ||
Supplier’s item number | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
1) If Batch / Lot No. is omitted on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), or it is different Batch / Lot No. on the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) this should not be labelled on the Distribution Unit (DU). 2) Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking. |
Example of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label with SSCC for Promotional Unit
Units where product information can not be entered on their own label
Mixed pallet
Two variants of Mixed pallets are described; with and without intermediate pallet.
On Mixed pallet it is not possible to enter product information on its own label.
Mixed pallet without intermediate pallet:
Pallet consisting of several different products.
Mixed pallet with intermediate pallet:
Pallet consisting of several different products, where each product is stacked in one or more layers, and where each different product is separated by an intermediate pallet.
The choice of type of mixed pallet depends, among other things, on handling costs, transport / environmental costs and storage technology and must be agreed bilaterally between the parties.
Packaging and stability of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be considered when choosing type of a Mixed pallet.
If intermediate pallet(s) are used, it shall always be ordered the amount of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) to complete a layer.
Mixed pallet (both with and without intermediate pallet) is labelled with Standard shipping label for Norwegian grocery sector.
Customer packed pallet
When a supplier assembles products for delivery to the final recipient, the products are packaged and labelled with SSCC at two packaging levels.
Customer packed units are labelled for delivery to the end-user and the Distribution Unit (DU) is labelled for delivery to the transit warehouse.
On Customer packed units it is not possible to enter product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) label.
A customer-packed pallet can be Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers, Customer packed unit – single route, multiple customers, or Customer packed unit – single customer.
This Customer packed units does not need to have its own load carrier and is being loaded on a standardized transport unit (for example, an EUR pallet).
Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers and Customer packed unit – single route, multiple customer is stacked in columns per. end receiver.
Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers is split after products receipt in the transit warehouse, and the individual Customer packed unit is forwarded to the final recipient. A prerequisite is that all Customer packed units located on one Distribution Unit (DU) are destined for the same transit warehouse.
Placement of labels on pallet
Two types of labels shall be used; label for product information and label for transport information.
Identical information
Same information (GS1-128 AI) shall only appear once on the product and transport label.
This means in practice that the same information can not be repeated on the same label or that the same information may appear on multiple labels on the device (pallet).
The exception is SSCC which is allowed on both labels if it is an identical number used.
Size and design of the labels
The following recommendation applies:
Recommended formats are:
Quality of labels
Bar code label with GS1-128 bar codes shall be done according to GS1 General Specifications Chapter 5.4.
Note in particular:
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is the unit the retailer buys.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) occurs in various forms, such as carton, reusable box / pallet box, intermediate carton and such.
The most important task of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is to secure Consumer Units (CU) from the time of manufacturing until it is finished exposed in a shop shelf.
The number of Consumer Units (CU) in a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is determined by the manufacturer, preferably in dialogue with the distributor / retail chain.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be adapted to the modular system, see Modular system
for picking and grouping of products can be done as efficient as possible.
Case fill rate shall be calculated. This is described in Case fill rate
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be designed to withstand the strain required in the value chain.
Automatic warehouses require that Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must be packed in a way that it can be lifted, stacked, clamped and handled with different mechanized devices, see Automated warehouse at distributor – greater understanding of the depalletization process.
Design requirements and packaging
When designing a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), it must be based on the modular system.
This means that the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should not be less than 100 x 150 mm and not more than 400 x 600 mm.
Example of best practices
Modular Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is not adapted to the modular system.
The size of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must consider the size of the shelf space for the current product group.
The short side of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should be front where appropriate.
There must be a simple and clear opening guide, preferably with illustration.
The packaging must be opened without using a knife.
When the Consumer Units (CU) is exposed in the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), the least possible of the Stock Keeping Unit’s (SKU) packaging should be visible when exposed in the store shelf.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must not weigh more than 15 kg.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be in recyclable cardboard or plastic.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Lid / plastic film is missing, which may cause Consumer Unit (CU) to fall out during internal transport.
Plastic boxes – all variants – must be considered to work in automated warehouse handling.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be form stable.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is form stable.
Example of best practices
Form stable Stock Keeping Units (SKU) that embraces close to its content and is strong enough to not deform.
Resists load on inbound transport (2 pallets in height), as well as handling through the value chain.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Not form stable. Do not resist strain on inbound transport (2 pallets in height), as well as handling through the value chain.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) that is only wrapped in plastic foil must have a tray / trough below.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) on tray / trough with plastic wrap.
Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must have straight sides.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with straight sides.
Glue quality and amount of glue on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be such that glued surfaces do not loosen.
Example of best practices
Glue quality and amount of glue is such that glued surfaces do not loosen.
Constructed example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Too little glue / too few glue points are included that flap gaps with subsequent stops in automatic warehouse systems.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should be stackable and “ears” should only be used where it is necessary for stability.
Should “ears” be used, these should not exceed 5mm and should not be used in conjunction with intermediate pallet sheets.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should not have loose lid.
The lid must be attached to the tray / trough in such a way that it does not loosen during handling. It is recommended to use glue points or a locking mechanism.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must have a center of gravity relative to the base that allows it to be handled on conveyor belts.
The height / width ratio should be below 1.7 to ensure that the products do not fall under internal transport in an automatic warehouse.
Example of best practices
The ratio height / width is below 1.7.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
The height / width ratio is over 1.7, which means that the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) can fall during internal transport.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) exposure front should not be less than 30 mm, regardless of the chosen solution.
The information on the Consumer Unit (CU) must be visible.
Packaging capacity
During the design of the product and packaging it must be considered that the outer dimensions of the finished Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), tray and otherwise, under the load of the above-mentioned product packaging, due to bulging, is within the margin. In practice, this can be from 0.5 to 1.0 cm.
Optimal transport requires the use of load capacity of the transport systems (weight and height).
Generally, the packaging should be able to carry a similar pallet (2 identical pallets) without any breakage or clamping damage during transport and storage.
Exceptions from this must be specified and labelled on the (Distribution Unit (DU).
Method of calculation of carrying capacity is described in Top load labelling system.
The packaging shall be able to withstand shipping with other products for shipping to the store in a rational way.
In order to achieve the industry’s common goal of efficient flow of products, reduced negative environmental impact, promoted sales and reduced losses, it is important to focus on:
Especially for reusable boxes / pallet boxes
Basically, Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is desired in cardboard, or in combination with plastic.
Reusable boxes are an alternative to Stock Keeping Units (SKU) in corrugated paper but must be agreed bilaterally.
Particularly for Intermediate cartons
The use of Intermediate cartons should be kept as low as possible and must be agreed bilaterally.
Intermediate cartons are accepted in cases where the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) solution is not possible because the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) does not meet the requirements for strength, stability or size and where the use of intermediate pallet sheet on pallet is not possible.
The intermediate carton must be labelled so that it clearly differs from the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and shall not weigh more than 15 kg.
The Distribution Unit (DU) is the unit the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is stacked on / packed in for transport to distributor.
Design of a Standard pallet (Standard pallet and Standard pallet – Low)
A Standard pallet must contain the same product (same GTIN) with a fixed number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU), in a fixed pallet pattern, with equal number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU)on each layer, and where labelling of unique product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) is possible.
The pallet structure shall contain as little excess volume of “air” as possible.
Standard pallet
Maximum pallet height must be 1200 mm incl. pallet. All pallets with total height above standard 1200mm with maximum height of 1250 mm to be agreed bilaterally between supplier and their customers.
Tolerance limit for existing products is 1249 mm.
Standard pallet – Low
Maximum pallet height shall be 600 mm incl. pallet.
Standard pallet – Low is used for low-frequency products and for products with short shelf life.
Principles for the construction of a palletpattern, central in calculation of top load weight, ref Top load labelling system.
When creating a pallet pattern, the following applies:
Types of pallet pattern
When constructing Distribution Units (DU), the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be placed in accordance with a given pallet pattern. These are referred to as bond stacking and column stacking. Pallets can also be built as a combination of bond stacking and column stacking.
Bond Stacking
Bond Stacking means that the units on every other layer are different, thus locking each other to a greater or lesser extent, but it reduces the compressive strength by approx. 40%.
Example of good pallet utilization and stacking with bond stacking, for good stability.
Column Stacking
Column stacking means stacking packages on top of each other without overlapping with other packages. This form of stacking gives maximum strength in terms of pressure load due to that the corners have better roll stiffness than the sides, but the stack gives poor stability without additional use of shrink wrap, strap, ribbon or similar.
Example of column stacking in the lower pallet layers, and bond stacking on the top layer. Combining the different stacking methods achieves good stack strength on the lower layers while the pallet is locked on top.
This is often a good alternative to intermediate pallet sheets.
Use of plastic to secure the pallet through the value chain
Use of intermediate pallet sheets
Intermediate pallet sheets must be minimized and used only if this is necessary to ensure quality and transportability of the pallet.
Intermediate pallet sheets are preferred if the alternative to this is intermediate cartons, “Ears” on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) or use of corner trims.
Where intermediate pallet sheets are used, the following requirements apply:
See also Automated storage at distributor – greater understanding of the depalletization process
Example of intermediate pallet sheet that does not meet quality requirements. The intermediate pallet sheet is a thin paper and is not suitable for automatic warehouse systems
Example of what happens when using “thin paper” intermediate pallet sheets.
The sheet is hanging down in the robot. It blocks for sensors that check that the layer is separated from the rest of the pallet. The robot will stop, and manual error correction must be carried out before the machine can be restarted.
Example of pallet with intermediate pallet sheets, too big – hanging on outside the pallet.
Is not suitable.
Intermediate pallet sheets with holes. Is not suitable.
Endringslogg
It is a prerequisite for maintaining strength, that Stock Keeping Units (SKU) are placed within the edges of the pallet with a small margin.
Devices placed on or outside the edge can cause damage with subsequent reduced carrying capacity / risk of injury.
The pallet area should be utilized as best as possible with products. By following the Modular system optimal use of the pallet is ensured and reduces the risk of the load shifting during transport.
Overhang is not accepted.
In its framework, STAND has defined guidelines, recommendations and best practices for how products should be marketed in the distribution chain, and how information on this should be exchanged between the parties.
Central to this is the consideration of the consumer and his expectation for safe food.
The guidelines for tracking, recall and withdrawal do not define food quality requirements, but describe what procedures and processes the industry has established to mitigate any unwanted effects should an incident or crisis occur in a product.
Best practices
The guidelines describe best practices in this area.
By following STAND’s framework, the guidelines will be achievable for all parties involved.
Some important prerequisites for best practice.
By ensuring that a total industry complies with STAND’s framework, consumers’ demands and expectations for safe food are fully met.
Objective of the guidelines
The guidelines are aimed at “Contribute to meet consumers’ expectations for safe products”.
Target Audience:
Products / areas to which the guidelines apply:
Medicines are exempt from the guidelines. Here we refer to separate regulations, not described here.
Certain types of food may be subject to additional regulatory requirements beyond what is described here. An example is the EU’s new tobacco directive (EU 2014/40) which make the requirements for traceability of tobacco products more stringent, but is not described here.
Legislative anchoring of the guidelines
The guidelines are among others based on Norwegian or European regulations on food safety and traceability:
Each party has an obligation to familiarize themselves with the regulations that apply to the products your business sells or are involved in.
The legislation does not impose requirements on how tracking should be performed, and what systems in which tracking information should be recorded. Manual systems may be sufficient as long as the requirements for tracking and tracking information are met.
Routines
The guidelines cover two procedures
Prepare crisis procedures
This is included:
At the heart of the legislation is the duty of each company to carry out a risk analysis of the health risks the products represent and how the company will relate to this in terms of traceability.
The purpose of the analysis is to reduce / prevent risk through
This assumes that the parties are aware of the risks the products may pose and have a preparedness that ensures that they react quickly, correctly and effectively in unwanted incidents. A Risk Analysis should therefore be performed on new products based on an intended relevant incident, so that it can be implemented as quickly as possible should a real incident occur for the product.
The risk analysis consists of three elements that both the government and industry should work on in an equal way:
See more about risk analysis here Design and content of a Risk Analysis.
If unwanted incidents or crises occur, it is important to be well prepared.
Possible scenarios for what might arise should be thought through and how this should be handled.
A Contingency Plan must be prepared that will allow you to cope with the situation quickly, correctly and effectively. The Contingency Plan must be accurate and accessible to all involved at all times.
The Contingency Plan includes:
See more about the Contingency Plan here Design and contents of a Contingency Plan.
The legislation requires that each company must have systems to document which products are purchased from each supplier and which customer has purchased the company’s finished products.
This also includes raw materials and other input that are covered by the legislation.
There is no requirement in the legislation for which type of systems to be used for this.
Businesses can practice more comprehensive tracking systems than the minimum regulatory requirements require, but this is either based on self-imposed requirements or agreements with, and orders from the contracting parties.
Tracking means being able to follow the physical flow of goods. This is often referred to as chain traceability, and assumes that all parties meet the requirements and follow the guidelines for tracking.
Tracking takes into account the legal requirements for all parties to be able to trace their products one step forward and one step back in the value chain.
Tracking one step forward:
This means to the address the products are delivered to.
An invoice system containing information about item number / item name, customer number / customer name and invoice date is sufficient to be able to trace one step forward in the value chain.
If the company is using batch/lot numbers for their products, this should be included in the invoice, despatch advice and the like, or linked directly to the company’s own systems.
Tracking one step backward:
This means the address from which the products are delivered.
The company must keep a log of received products describing which products were purchased from whom and in which quantitiy, and date.
If the addresses for where products are delivered from or delivered to are not in accordance with the legal ownership of the products and the invoice process, this should be agreed separately between the parties.
The main purpose of the tracking information is to lay the groundwork for effective blocking, withdrawal or recall of products.
Central tracking information is:
It is a requirement that the products are labeled to enable tracking.
The marking must be affixed to the product packaging and legible.
The following applies to finished goods traded between supplier and distributor / retailer:
Information to be marked:
Load carrier (for example pallet) shall be marked with SSCC.
The sender must in his system have an overview of which recipient the product was sent to, and also the recipient must have an overview of which sender the product was received from. Both sender and recipient must be identified with GLN.
Sender shall in his system register:
Recipient shall in his system register:
The following applies to raw materials and other inputs:
More about tracking information and how the product can be tracked in the value chain is described here Recommended traceability methods in the value chain.
Alarm / Notification
An incident can occur in all steps of the value chain, at the consumer, retailer, distributor or at the supplier itself. It is important that the supplier is notified as soon as possible.
Notification of an incident shall be given to one alert point at each operator. The alert point should be agreed in advance and always be staffed / available.
The industry has decided that for products registered in the Tradesolution EPD base, Tradesolution ReCall portal should be used for blocking, recall or withdrawal. Access is available at epd@tradesolution.no
For products not registered in the Tradesolution EPD base, a Notification schema for recall, withdrawal or blocking of a product may be used provided that this has been agreed between the supplier and the distributor/wholesaler. Notification schema can be downloaded from Downloads.
Required information to follow an alarm / alert
To identify the scope of the alarm / alert, the product’s GTIN / EPD, best before date, batch / Lot number and SSCC on affected pallets must always be stated. This applies regardless of whether the product is registered in the Tradesolution EPD base or not.
By using the portal, the supplier gets / is secured
The ReCall portal can also be used in situations where you want to withdraw products with quality defects.
Distributors have built their own systems and routines for alerting crisis situations and blocking the products at their distribution warehouses and retailers. This is not part of the ReCall portal.
The following routine applies when registering an incident or crisis
The practical implementation of the routine is described here Routine when registering an incident or crisis, in the Tradesolution ReCall portal.
Conclusion
Through the guidelines, the industry contributes to satisfying consumers’ demands and expectations for safe products, provided that an overall industry complies with the guidelines.
Should an incident or crisis occur, there are routines and tools that, in a simple, fast and secure way, limit incidental damage.
An accurate and limited recall or withdrawal will be possible.
This reduces costs for all parties in the value chain and minimizes potential reputational loss.
Intentions for measurement of service level
Measurement of service levels is a topic that most players are concerned with and are an important element in the relationships between supplier and customer.
The parties are free to agree whether to measure the degree of service.
If the parties agree to establish an agreement, STAND recommends that STAND’s definitions be used.
A challenge in relation to the exchange and evaluation of service level data has been that the trading partners often use different definitions and conditions for measurement and follow-up.
The recommendation contains suggestions for target measures and common definitions for measuring service levels. The purpose is to establish a common platform as a basis for measurement, communication and mutual evaluation of performance.
Joint exchanges of measurement results, based on the proposed definitions, could contribute to improved service levels and contribute to increased understanding of the parties’ views on customer and delivery services.
Target measures are based on DLFs (Dagligvaruleverantörers Förbund) and DULOGs (Dagligvaruhandelns Utvecklings- och Logistikgrupp ) common definitions, established in Sweden in 1998.
With this as a base as well as experience from companies with international relations, the prioritized definitions build upon the need for common understanding, measurement and evaluation of cross-border service.
With continuous follow-up, development and trends can be monitored over time. This will probably be more interesting than single results. Greater trend deviations are when warning signals and improvement programs should be implemented to reduce the likelihood that a similar situation will arise in the future.
Target measures
The recommendation describes 6 different target measures, of which STAND recommends that 3 of these are prioritized, as these can be quickly implemented in today’s systems.
Other target measures are composed of different combinations of priority targets.
Selection of target measures is done by the parties themselves and described in bilateral agreements.
The industry has an increasing focus on improving the service level to consumers, ie reducing out-of-stock in the stores. This is currently being worked on, including developing agreed definitions of how this should be measured and followed up. The following two KPIs can be used:
1. Lost sales:
When stock is zero at the end of the day, this will be set off against lost sales in the store.
Example: You have sold 40 during the day, and at the end of the day, the stock is zero. If this item had a sales forecast of 100 that day, the shelf service level of this item would be 40%.
When you aggregate this to store level, we will get a figure of how many customers were actually affected (based on the forecast) by the empty shelf.
2. Empty shelf
Number of article lines / products with stock = 0
Empty Shelf = ———————————————- ———————-
Number of article lines / products in the assortment in total
Assortment is defined as what purchasing / category management has decided.
Deviations between what the individual store has in their space program, and the defined assortment for the store may have to be measured with a separate key figure; assortment loyalty.
For the reports, inventory = 0 means that inventory is 0 or less than zero in the store’s systems.
Other priority target measures:
Combined target measures:
The target measures can be used by both the customer and the supplier for follow-up of each other’s performance.
Prerequisites for target measures and definitions
Measure
In the measurements, the unit of measurement is described as “sales unit».
It is recommended that Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is used as a sales unit. Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is established in most systems and is the base for transactions; ex. ordering, delivery, billing etc. to the store.
Consumer Units (CU) as a unit of measurement, however, should be the vision and goal of the future, as the Consumer Unit (CU) is the unit of measurement that is uniform and shared throughout the value chain.
Agreement on measurement of service level
Which target measures to use and what definitions should apply should be anchored in a bilateral agreement.
The agreement can regulate conditions such as:
The target measures are based on three important dimensions in the term «service level»:
The priority targets measures should be followed and evaluated continuously with focus on level, trends and development.
Target measures Correct quantity – availability
The target measure “Correct quantity” measures availability as precision in quantity delivered.
Definition:
Number of delivered sales Units | = Availability |
Quantity of ordered sales Units |
The quantity ordered is the amount that the customer initially ordered.
Not delivered quantity represents deviations in delivery.
Target measure At the right time – reliability
The target measure “At the right time” measure reliability as precision in delivery time.
The target measure is used to measure compliance with time limits defined in the agreement between the parties.
The target measure can be used along several dimensions in the value chain.
Examples may be if orders are sent at the right time, if order confirmations are sent at the right time, if delivery is picked up at the right time, if Despatch Advice is sent at the right time, etc.
Definition (with example order):
Number of late or early delivery orders | = Reliability |
Total quantity of orders |
Delayed or premature is determined by whether exchange / delivery is within the agreed time frame.
At Incoterms Ex Works delivery terms, the assessment of the supplier’s reliability is on the supplier’s ramp.
The delivery is received when the order / delivery etc., is acknowledged for.
Target measures Correct Administration – Security
The target measure “Proper Administration” measures security as compliance between what is ordered in the order and what has been delivered and has been invoiced, that is, the correct product without errors and with the correct documentation.
Definition:
Quantity of orders without credit / debit notes | = SAFETY |
Total quantity of orders |
Correct administration means that Despatch Advice, shipping notes, invoices etc. are complete and error-free in relation to the delivery.
Only credit and debit notes affecting physical delivery are included in the measurement.
The target measure can also be used to measure the quality of orders from the customer.
Examples of calculation of service level for priority target measures can be found in the document
The priority target measures can be combined in different ways, to create Combined target measures.
STAND has defined 3 examples:
Target measure Delivery Order – Availability
The target measure “Delivery Order” gives the proportion of the orders that are properly delivered.
Definition:
Quantity of complete orders delivered | = Level of Order Delivery |
Total number of orders ordered |
A complete delivery order contains all ordered sales units, in the correct quantity
Availability will primarily be measured as the priority target measure “Proper Quantity – Availability”, but to calculate the combined measurements below, it is a prerequisite that “Delivery Order – Availability” is calculated.
Complete orders at the right time – Availability & Reliability
The target measure describes both accessibility and reliability in the interaction.
The target measure is composed of the target measures:
Definition:
Availability expressed per order
– Quantity of late or early delivery orders |
= Complete orders at the right time |
Total quantity of orders |
Only one error per. order is counted
The measurement of “Complete Orders at the Right Time” shall be done at the place of arrival. At Incoterms Ex Works delivery terms, this is the supplier’s ramp
The perfect order
This is the most demanding target measure and measures all types of deviations regarding complete orders.
The target measure is composed of three previously defined target measures:
Definition:
Quantity of complete orders delivered
– late or early delivery orders – Orders with missing or incorrect documents – Orders with credit / debit notes |
= The perfect order |
Total quantity of orders |
Only one error per. order is counted
If both the supplier and the customer’s obligations are considered in the target measure, the target measure represents the performance that the parties create in common.
Examples of calculation of service level for combined target measures can be found in the document
Examples of combined target measures
The sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has, which may be relevant for settlement for deliveries to a customer, regardless of the method of distribution.
The process is based on the fact that all documentation is exchanged by EDI.
This sub process consists of the following activities:
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
EDI – Electronic Data Interchange – is used in the retail industry to exchange commercial documents like Order, Order Receipt, Order Confirmation, Despatch Advice, Invoice and Invoice Receipt.
EDI can be performed in various ways, from fully automated processes both at customer and supplier, to web solutions where information is registered manually.
EDI is used for all distribution types.
Overview of EDI messages and in which processes they are used
Which EDI messages to use will vary with the distribution type.
An overview of this, along with deadlines for when the messages are to be sent, are described in EDI message, type of distribution and deadlines.
Before using EDI, it is necessary to clarify which messages to be used, message formats, exchange methods, electronic message addresses, etc. This documented the EDI Exchange agreement.
This document also specifies other bilateral issues related to the exchange of EDI messages.
To ensure that both parties and all business functions are familiar with all bilateral agreements, it is crucial that the EDI Exchange Agreement is used actively.
How to get started with EDI is described in Implement EDI in the retail trade.
In order to start using EDI, trading documents must be translated into an EDI format.
The following formats are available:
Revisions of the EDI formats, is documented in Change log current version vs. past versions
Send and receive invoice and invoice receipt
Send invoice
Based on the products and quantity delivered, as well as other terms of sale and delivery, the supplier produces an invoice and sends to the customer / invoice recipient.
Invoice must be sent by EDI unless otherwise agreed bilaterally.
One invoice shall only include delivery from one Despatch Advice.
At delivery terms Ex Works, one invoice will only deal with products delivered from one warehouse.
If credit note is sent, one credit note should only refer to one invoice.
Invoice must be continuously numbered, state the place of delivery, the invoice date and the name and address of the supplier and buyer. The invoice shall provide information about the product’s name, quantity and price, as well as tax and fees.
Receive invoice and send invoice receipt
If the supplier desires / needs it, it can be agreed bilaterally that the customer will send an invoice receipt to the supplier as confirmation that the customer has received an invoice.
Invoice receipt shall be sent by EDI unless otherwise agreed bilaterally.
The invoice receipt is available in two versions; simple and advanced invoice receipt. Difference is the degree of detail on content. Which version used must be bilaterally agreed.
The following content may be included:
One invoice receipt must cover only one invoice.
Invoice receipt can also be sent upon receipt of a credit note. Same rules as for invoice apply.
Receive invoice receipt
How the invoice receipt is used by the vendor in their internal systems is not covered by the STAND Guidelines.
The process describes the flow of information and the physical flow of the product.
This is illustrated in a timeline.
What areas the standard for assortments changes apply to
Assortment changes including phase-in and phase-out of products, both new products and codes for changes to assortment/ changes in listings.
Supplies of Promotional Units and campaigns are not included.
Seasonal product defines as “Product sold for a limited period of time related to a season defined between the contracting parties”.
Seasonal products are launched according to the same template as regular news, with the following exceptions:
An overview of seasonal time frames and respective deadlines is clearly described in agreements between the parties.
Bilateral agreements such as pre-launch and / or campaigns which does not affect deliveries to other parties can be included. Pre launch defines as “Bilateral agreement between supplier and customer to launch a product ahead of the regular launch time frame, or season”.
Products distributed over distributor, via Crossdock or directly to retailers following the same path.
The timeline indicates the very last deadline for completion of the respective activity.
Many of the activities are sequential, where startup assumes that previous activities have been completed.
Where possible, encourage mutual involvement as early as possible in the process to reduce costs and uncertainties. See also Communication and data exchange
The retail chains will operate with different forms, but they largely contain the same.
Current deadlines are available in section for downloads.
Any meetings shall be arranged in a reasonable time. Both parties must contribute to ongoing dialogue
The supplier must register sufficient master data in the EPD database for the product to be assigned an EPD number. This is phase 1 of master data registration, and must occur at the latest in U-15 (timeline A1).
Remaining relevant basic data information according to defined information width must be registered in the U-6 (timeline A3.1) after assortment verification). This is phase 2 of master data registration.
Deadline for submission of a control measurement product at EPD Checkpoint / Tradesolution is Friday in U-3 (Timeline A8).
Reference is also made to the process description on www.tradesolution.no.
Endringslogg
In the meeting where product news is presented, the supplier presents its news and suggestions for product range changes together with:
If needed, changes outside of agreed change time frame should be followed as far as practicable, following these standard timelines and processes.
Changes are agreed bilaterally and should not normally result in physical changes of shop shelves.
Changes of pure technical nature, such as changed brand requirements, minor adjustments to packaging may be done by simplified administrative processing, agreed bilaterally.
Launch will not be subject to major deviations between forecast (A4 in timeline) and actual ordering. In general, product news should be ready for pick-up from supplier from Monday U-2, or at the agreed time.
The supplier and the retail chain shall keep each other updated in all circumstances that may be relevant for successful assortment change.
Sales and inventory data are made available as soon as they can be communicated.
Target measures
Service Level – for wholesaler and retailer – are measured and exchanged.
For definition of service level refer to Service level – Purpose, types of target measures and assumptions with any clarifications in the retail chain / supplier agreement.
In case of significant deviations in service levels, assortment coding and forecasts are therefore natural reference points.
Good service level in the entire value chain is today a prerequisite for rational and competitive product flow, which in turn assumes that the performance can be measured and followed up.
Measurement and evaluation of service levels are crucial to prioritize and implement measures aimed at continuous improvements.
The parties are free to agree whether to measure the degree of service.
If the parties agree to establish an agreement, STAND recommends that STAND’s definitions be used.
Areas affected by, and subject to guidelines from STAND are:
Intentions for measurement of service level
Measurement of service levels is a topic that most players are concerned with and are an important element in the relationships between supplier and customer.
The parties are free to agree whether to measure the degree of service.
If the parties agree to establish an agreement, STAND recommends that STAND’s definitions be used.
A challenge in relation to the exchange and evaluation of service level data has been that the trading partners often use different definitions and conditions for measurement and follow-up.
The recommendation contains suggestions for target measures and common definitions for measuring service levels. The purpose is to establish a common platform as a basis for measurement, communication and mutual evaluation of performance.
Joint exchanges of measurement results, based on the proposed definitions, could contribute to improved service levels and contribute to increased understanding of the parties’ views on customer and delivery services.
Target measures are based on DLFs (Dagligvaruleverantörers Förbund) and DULOGs (Dagligvaruhandelns Utvecklings- och Logistikgrupp ) common definitions, established in Sweden in 1998.
With this as a base as well as experience from companies with international relations, the prioritized definitions build upon the need for common understanding, measurement and evaluation of cross-border service.
With continuous follow-up, development and trends can be monitored over time. This will probably be more interesting than single results. Greater trend deviations are when warning signals and improvement programs should be implemented to reduce the likelihood that a similar situation will arise in the future.
Target measures
The recommendation describes 6 different target measures, of which STAND recommends that 3 of these are prioritized, as these can be quickly implemented in today’s systems.
Other target measures are composed of different combinations of priority targets.
Selection of target measures is done by the parties themselves and described in bilateral agreements.
The industry has an increasing focus on improving the service level to consumers, ie reducing out-of-stock in the stores. This is currently being worked on, including developing agreed definitions of how this should be measured and followed up. The following two KPIs can be used:
1. Lost sales:
When stock is zero at the end of the day, this will be set off against lost sales in the store.
Example: You have sold 40 during the day, and at the end of the day, the stock is zero. If this item had a sales forecast of 100 that day, the shelf service level of this item would be 40%.
When you aggregate this to store level, we will get a figure of how many customers were actually affected (based on the forecast) by the empty shelf.
2. Empty shelf
Number of article lines / products with stock = 0
Empty Shelf = ———————————————- ———————-
Number of article lines / products in the assortment in total
Assortment is defined as what purchasing / category management has decided.
Deviations between what the individual store has in their space program, and the defined assortment for the store may have to be measured with a separate key figure; assortment loyalty.
For the reports, inventory = 0 means that inventory is 0 or less than zero in the store’s systems.
Other priority target measures:
Combined target measures:
The target measures can be used by both the customer and the supplier for follow-up of each other’s performance.
Prerequisites for target measures and definitions
Measure
In the measurements, the unit of measurement is described as “sales unit».
It is recommended that Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is used as a sales unit. Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is established in most systems and is the base for transactions; ex. ordering, delivery, billing etc. to the store.
Consumer Units (CU) as a unit of measurement, however, should be the vision and goal of the future, as the Consumer Unit (CU) is the unit of measurement that is uniform and shared throughout the value chain.
Agreement on measurement of service level
Which target measures to use and what definitions should apply should be anchored in a bilateral agreement.
The agreement can regulate conditions such as:
The target measures are based on three important dimensions in the term «service level»:
The priority targets measures should be followed and evaluated continuously with focus on level, trends and development.
Target measures Correct quantity – availability
The target measure “Correct quantity” measures availability as precision in quantity delivered.
Definition:
Number of delivered sales Units | = Availability |
Quantity of ordered sales Units |
The quantity ordered is the amount that the customer initially ordered.
Not delivered quantity represents deviations in delivery.
Target measure At the right time – reliability
The target measure “At the right time” measure reliability as precision in delivery time.
The target measure is used to measure compliance with time limits defined in the agreement between the parties.
The target measure can be used along several dimensions in the value chain.
Examples may be if orders are sent at the right time, if order confirmations are sent at the right time, if delivery is picked up at the right time, if Despatch Advice is sent at the right time, etc.
Definition (with example order):
Number of late or early delivery orders | = Reliability |
Total quantity of orders |
Delayed or premature is determined by whether exchange / delivery is within the agreed time frame.
At Incoterms Ex Works delivery terms, the assessment of the supplier’s reliability is on the supplier’s ramp.
The delivery is received when the order / delivery etc., is acknowledged for.
Target measures Correct Administration – Security
The target measure “Proper Administration” measures security as compliance between what is ordered in the order and what has been delivered and has been invoiced, that is, the correct product without errors and with the correct documentation.
Definition:
Quantity of orders without credit / debit notes | = SAFETY |
Total quantity of orders |
Correct administration means that Despatch Advice, shipping notes, invoices etc. are complete and error-free in relation to the delivery.
Only credit and debit notes affecting physical delivery are included in the measurement.
The target measure can also be used to measure the quality of orders from the customer.
Examples of calculation of service level for priority target measures can be found in the document
Examples of priority target measures
The priority target measures can be combined in different ways, to create Combined target measures.
STAND has defined 3 examples:
Target measure Delivery Order – Availability
The target measure “Delivery Order” gives the proportion of the orders that are properly delivered.
Definition:
Quantity of complete orders delivered | = Level of Order Delivery |
Total number of orders ordered |
A complete delivery order contains all ordered sales units, in the correct quantity
Availability will primarily be measured as the priority target measure “Proper Quantity – Availability”, but to calculate the combined measurements below, it is a prerequisite that “Delivery Order – Availability” is calculated.
Complete orders at the right time – Availability & Reliability
The target measure describes both accessibility and reliability in the interaction.
The target measure is composed of the target measures:
Definition:
Availability expressed per order
– Quantity of late or early delivery orders |
= Complete orders at the right time |
Total quantity of orders |
Only one error per. order is counted
The measurement of “Complete Orders at the Right Time” shall be done at the place of arrival. At Incoterms Ex Works delivery terms, this is the supplier’s ramp
The perfect order
This is the most demanding target measure and measures all types of deviations regarding complete orders.
The target measure is composed of three previously defined target measures:
Definition:
Quantity of complete orders delivered
– late or early delivery orders – Orders with missing or incorrect documents – Orders with credit / debit notes |
= The perfect order |
Total quantity of orders |
Only one error per. order is counted
If both the supplier and the customer’s obligations are considered in the target measure, the target measure represents the performance that the parties create in common.
Examples of calculation of service level for combined target measures can be found in the document
This sub process consists of points (A3-A5 in timeline):
The feedback from the retail chain should include:
If the retail chain’s assortment selection of products leads to a supplier deciding to cancel or postpone launch, this should be reported to the relevant retail chain’s category manager by latest Friday at U-6.
For products being discontinued, any deviations from ordinary down sale must be clearly communicated in a reasonable time.
In case of product shortages at the supplier, the volume as confirmed in U-6 (A4 in timeline) is used as the basis of deviation handling ref.
Routine for delay from supplier / Private label
However, order confirmation of orders (A6) delivered no later than Tuesday in U-3 is to be considered as a binding agreement. Order confirmations will be given Wednesday U-3 (A6.1). Current deadlines are available in section for downloads.
Endringslogg
Assortment change can be done inventory-managed or time-managed.
Inventory-managed assortment change means that outgoing products are sold until inventory is at a low level or sold out and then sales of the new product starts.
In the case of inventory-managed assortment change, new products will replace an outgoing item and / or take over its place in the shelf – link / product connection is used. Sales start will depend on inventory and sales on outgoing item. The supplier and the retail chain must agree which stocks are included and calculate the date of the transition. Campaigns or other steps to make the change can be agreed. It is normal to set a final deadline for the delivery of the outgoing item.
Inventory-managed assortment change significantly reduces the risk of empty shelves and losses throughout the value chain and should be chosen if possible.
Optimal inventory-managed assortment change requires close collaboration between supplier and individual wholesaler, including dialogue on inventories and sales development. It will not be pre-orders from wholesaler in U-3 if inventory-managed in-phase is used. Order and startup are bilaterally agreed.
Time-managed assortment change implies that a date for the start of sale of products is set. Time-managed assortment change is selected when inventory-managed is not optimal, eg by phasing in products that receive heavy sales support or where the physical attributes of the product require rebuilding of shelves. With time-managed in-phase, relevant wholesale warehouses and stores must be filled up at the same time. The volume for this is significant and must be calculated separately – referred to as «pipeline fill»
News to be distributed in several trading chains is launched in one of the industry’s joint launch time frames.
Any meetings shall be arranged in a reasonable time. Both parties must contribute to ongoing dialogue
The supplier must register sufficient master data in the EPD database for the product to be assigned an EPD number. This is phase 1 of master data registration, and must occur at the latest in U-15 (timeline A1).
Remaining relevant basic data information according to defined information width must be registered in the U-6 (timeline A3.1) after assortment verification). This is phase 2 of master data registration.
Deadline for submission of a control measurement product at EPD Checkpoint / Tradesolution is Friday in U-3 (Timeline A8).
Reference is also made to the process description on www.tradesolution.no.
Endringslogg
In the case of inventory-managed in-phasing, the replacement product will most often have the same sales volume and profile as the outgoing product. There will normally be no need for own forecasts but close dialogue about in-phasing time.
With time-managed in-phasing, the forecast is divided into three and determined by the supplier:
Supplier must confirm delivery capacity in U-6.
Tradesolution has developed a portal for the exchange of sales forecasts between supplier and distributor, initially for new launches and assortment changes.
REMA and COOP use this solution, while Norgesgruppen / ASKO uses its own supplier portal.
Example of screenshot from the forecast portal
Any delay must be notified immediately with the information available at the time of notification. Message must be sent to the department of category /purchase and the department of logistics.
In case of delay, a distinction is made between notified and unannounced.
Read more about:
Routine of notified delays (A7 in timeline)
Current deadlines are available in section for downloads.
If needed, changes outside of agreed change time frame should be followed as far as practicable, following these standard timelines and processes.
Changes are agreed bilaterally and should not normally result in physical changes of shop shelves.
Changes of pure technical nature, such as changed brand requirements, minor adjustments to packaging may be done by simplified administrative processing, agreed bilaterally.
Launch will not be subject to major deviations between forecast (A4 in timeline) and actual ordering. In general, product news should be ready for pick-up from supplier from Monday U-2, or at the agreed time.
The process is generic and describes the following points:
Distributor will order no later than Tuesday in U-3 to meet expected needs – for pipeline fill and sales in start-up week.
If both parties wish for a different order flow, deviations may be agreed, however, obligations are in accordance with volume confirmation A4.
The order is based on the chain planograms and / or other systems.
The order’s pick-up / delivery time shall provide the supplier with the maximum amount of time required to ensure total coverage and possible discrepancy while safeguarding the cost-effective flow of products to the distributor.
Current deadlines are available in section for downloads.
The supplier and the retail chain shall keep each other updated in all circumstances that may be relevant for successful assortment change.
Sales and inventory data are made available as soon as they can be communicated.
Target measures
Service Level – for wholesaler and retailer – are measured and exchanged.
For definition of service level refer to Service level – Purpose, types of target measures and assumptions with any clarifications in the retail chain / supplier agreement.
In case of significant deviations in service levels, assortment coding and forecasts are therefore natural reference points.
All new products follow common routines for filling of shelves.
For products with shelf life less than 60 days, the wholesaler order(s) will meet the fulfilment requirements and expected supplement to the store the first sales days, rarely more than 6 days.
The wholesaler will give the supplier access to data showing the number of stores per retail chain that has sales on the current item and the number of Consumer Units (CU) sold (POS), accrued and accumulated.
Data is delivered in the first 8 weeks after launch.
The supplier is expected to have high readiness for implementing any measures to ensure continuous delivery capacity.
There are defined deadlines for submission of products to Tradesolution for photography and control measurement. This sub process contains the following points:
Product images of all new products should according to the timeline be available in Tradesolutions MediaStore within U-3.
See process description at: www.tradesolution.no
Current deadlines are available in section for downloads.
Deadline for submission of a control measurement product at EPD Checkpoint / Tradesolution is Friday in U-3 (Timeline A8).
See process description at: www.tradesolution.no
Current deadlines are available in section for downloads.
After all launches, an evaluation will be made. This is carried out in conjunction with the previous product news launches. Below is further information about:
8 weeks after sales start, the supply of new products is evaluated.
The evaluation is carried out in conjunction with the previous 2 product news time frames.
Suppliers who have performed poorly can be notified in writing of imperfect deliveries and to provide a statement describing the cause and actions to be taken.
Given continued delivery challenges (forthcoming news time frame), the supplier may be notified in writing that new products is not considered unless convincing documentation of implemented actions is handed over.
Assessment and decision on response if deviations occur are handled by the individual retail chain.
All new products follow common routines for filling of shelves.
For products with shelf life less than 60 days, the wholesaler order(s) will meet the fulfilment requirements and expected supplement to the store the first sales days, rarely more than 6 days.
The wholesaler will give the supplier access to data showing the number of stores per retail chain that has sales on the current item and the number of Consumer Units (CU) sold (POS), accrued and accumulated.
Data is delivered in the first 8 weeks after launch.
The supplier is expected to have high readiness for implementing any measures to ensure continuous delivery capacity.
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has, which may be relevant in planning and preparation for a production of a product to be sold in the retail trade.
In addition to the finished product, raw materials and other input factors included in the finished product are also included, as well as packaging, load carriers / pallets used for transportation and storage of the finished product.
The areas described are:
Reducing food waste is an overall goal in society. Food waste related to exceeding the limit values of shelf life between the parties in the value chain, constitutes a significant part.
Surveys shows that food waste are significantly reduced if the store and the consumer have a larger part of the total shelf life.
It is therefore a goal that the producer and distributor consume the least amount of available time and that the maximum amount of time is exposed to the consumer.
The grocery industry has defined one Table for allocation of shelf life of a product which regulates the responsibility for and expectations the recipient of products has, linked to shelf life. Online players with b2c sales will be defined as retailers when dividing total shelf life.
In case of minor exceedances of the table’s limit values, participants are expected to seek solutions that provide the lowest possible food waste.
The parties are encouraged to develop performance and collaborate to reduce consumption of shelf life.
Endringslogg
The responsibility for determining type of shelf life labelling and total shelf life lies with the manufacturer. The shelf life is calculated from the time the product is ready for sales, for example from after the product has been matured and checked.
The actual shelf life of the product is affected by a variety of conditions, primarily the properties of the raw material and the external impact.
The manufacturers are encouraged to assess whether dynamic shelf life labelling can be practiced.
This means that total shelf life can be expanded when conditions allows for this to be done.
The number of days marked on a product may therefore be more than the number of shelf life on selected products.
According to the Mattilsynet (Norwegian Food Safety Authority), the use of dynamic shelf life is within the current regulations.
Labelling
The packaging (Consumer Units (CU) and Stock Keeping Units (SKU)) shall be labelled according to the manufacturer’s choice of type of shelf life and total shelf life.
“Expiry date overdue” is the main reason for food waste in the value chain. A more flexible shelf life labelling throughout the year could help reduce food waste.
Shelf life is affected by several conditions that may vary. It is possible to specify increased shelf life in periods of time or for batches. This is termed as “dynamic shelf life». In practice, it means that overall shelf life can be expanded when conditions give the opportunity to do so.
The supplier should inform the customer if dynamic shelf life is applied.
According to the Mattilsynet (Norwegian Food Safety Authority), the use of dynamic shelf life within the current regulations: “It is the manufacturer who assesses and puts the shelf life of the food products. Manufacturers know the raw materials and processes used. Shelf life should be based on common and realistic conditions for transportation, storage and sales. This does not prevent manufacturers from taking into account that there may also be different external conditions for the shelf life of the foodstuffs. In practice, manufacturers often put the shelf life out of the most demanding but realistic conditions throughout the year. If the business has full control and overview of the terms, nothing stops them from choosing different shelf life throughout the year for the same product. This means the food is given a shelf life that is adapted to season, temperature and other conditions.”
More information can be found here: http://www.mattilsynet.no/mat_og_vann/merking_av_mat/generelle_krav_til_merking_av_mat/holdbarhetsmerking_paa_matvarer.2711
Examples of using dynamic shelf life that could have longer shelf life than often is the practice today:
In order to make a realistic assessment, the producer assumes that the products are stored in normal outdoor / room temperature for a shorter period of time through the value chain, such as transshipment, stock refills in stores, consumer carts, transport from store to home and in the home (in and out of the fridge and on the kitchen table). In summer, the outdoor / room temperature is higher and thus has a greater impact on shelf life. To make a realistic assessment, it’s normal to take into account the assumptions in the summer period and determine the shelf life based on this, and the same shelf life is normally used throughout the year.
Different companies may have different production methods and / or hygiene standards. To make a realistic assessment, the starting point is the technology that provides the shortest shelf life.
The regulations or internal rules stipulate that raw materials that are up to x days “old” may be used at any given time in the manufacturing process. Then the shelf life is determined by using x-day-old raw material each time. This even though you often use fresher raw materials than x days.
Raw material quality may vary naturally over a year, and in some cases this may affect shelf life. To make a realistic assessment, the raw material with the shortest shelf life is used, and normally uses the same shelf life of the finished foods throughout the year.
Dynamic shelf life and the EPD database
There is no need for any changes to the EPD database to utilize dynamic shelf life.
It is the product’s shortest shelf life during the year the supplier must register in the EPD database.
This is an animation that show what pallets are valid for distribution.
Requirements specifications can be downloaded here:
Requirements for approved EUR-pallets
Specification for reusable 1/1 plastic pallet
Specification for reusable 1/2 plastic pallet
Requirements specification for reusable 1/3 plastic pallet (from NLP)
Specification for reusable 1/4 plastic pallet
Requirements Specification reusable 1/2 wooden pallet
Requirements specification for 1/3 and 1/2 disposable cardboard pallet
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is the unit the retailer buys.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) occurs in various forms, such as carton, reusable box / pallet box, intermediate carton and such.
The most important task of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is to secure Consumer Units (CU) from the time of manufacturing until it is finished exposed in a shop shelf.
The number of Consumer Units (CU) in a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is determined by the manufacturer, preferably in dialogue with the distributor / retail chain.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be adapted to the modular system, see Modular system
for picking and grouping of products can be done as efficient as possible.
Case fill rate shall be calculated. This is described in Case fill rate
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be designed to withstand the strain required in the value chain.
Automatic warehouses require that Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must be packed in a way that it can be lifted, stacked, clamped and handled with different mechanized devices, see Automated warehouse at distributor – greater understanding of the depalletization process.
Design requirements and packaging
When designing a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), it must be based on the modular system.
This means that the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should not be less than 100 x 150 mm and not more than 400 x 600 mm.
Example of best practices
Modular Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is not adapted to the modular system.
The size of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must consider the size of the shelf space for the current product group.
The short side of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should be front where appropriate.
There must be a simple and clear opening guide, preferably with illustration.
The packaging must be opened without using a knife.
When the Consumer Units (CU) is exposed in the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), the least possible of the Stock Keeping Unit’s (SKU) packaging should be visible when exposed in the store shelf.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must not weigh more than 15 kg.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be in recyclable cardboard or plastic.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Lid / plastic film is missing, which may cause Consumer Unit (CU) to fall out during internal transport.
Plastic boxes – all variants – must be considered to work in automated warehouse handling.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be form stable.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is form stable.
Example of best practices
Form stable Stock Keeping Units (SKU) that embraces close to its content and is strong enough to not deform.
Resists load on inbound transport (2 pallets in height), as well as handling through the value chain.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Not form stable. Do not resist strain on inbound transport (2 pallets in height), as well as handling through the value chain.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) that is only wrapped in plastic foil must have a tray / trough below.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) on tray / trough with plastic wrap.
Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must have straight sides.
Example of best practices
Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with straight sides.
Glue quality and amount of glue on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be such that glued surfaces do not loosen.
Example of best practices
Glue quality and amount of glue is such that glued surfaces do not loosen.
Constructed example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
Too little glue / too few glue points are included that flap gaps with subsequent stops in automatic warehouse systems.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should be stackable and “ears” should only be used where it is necessary for stability.
Should “ears” be used, these should not exceed 5mm and should not be used in conjunction with intermediate pallet sheets.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) should not have loose lid.
The lid must be attached to the tray / trough in such a way that it does not loosen during handling. It is recommended to use glue points or a locking mechanism.
The Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must have a center of gravity relative to the base that allows it to be handled on conveyor belts.
The height / width ratio should be below 1.7 to ensure that the products do not fall under internal transport in an automatic warehouse.
Example of best practices
The ratio height / width is below 1.7.
Example of an inappropriate Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
The height / width ratio is over 1.7, which means that the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) can fall during internal transport.
Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) exposure front should not be less than 30 mm, regardless of the chosen solution.
The information on the Consumer Unit (CU) must be visible.
Packaging capacity
During the design of the product and packaging it must be considered that the outer dimensions of the finished Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), tray and otherwise, under the load of the above-mentioned product packaging, due to bulging, is within the margin. In practice, this can be from 0.5 to 1.0 cm.
Optimal transport requires the use of load capacity of the transport systems (weight and height).
Generally, the packaging should be able to carry a similar pallet (2 identical pallets) without any breakage or clamping damage during transport and storage.
Exceptions from this must be specified and labelled on the (Distribution Unit (DU).
Method of calculation of carrying capacity is described in Top load labelling system.
The packaging shall be able to withstand shipping with other products for shipping to the store in a rational way.
In order to achieve the industry’s common goal of efficient flow of products, reduced negative environmental impact, promoted sales and reduced losses, it is important to focus on:
Especially for reusable boxes / pallet boxes
Basically, Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is desired in cardboard, or in combination with plastic.
Reusable boxes are an alternative to Stock Keeping Units (SKU) in corrugated paper but must be agreed bilaterally.
Particularly for Intermediate cartons
The use of Intermediate cartons should be kept as low as possible and must be agreed bilaterally.
Intermediate cartons are accepted in cases where the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) solution is not possible because the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) does not meet the requirements for strength, stability or size and where the use of intermediate pallet sheet on pallet is not possible.
The intermediate carton must be labelled so that it clearly differs from the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and shall not weigh more than 15 kg.
In its framework, STAND has defined guidelines, recommendations and best practices for how products should be marketed in the distribution chain, and how information on this should be exchanged between the parties.
Central to this is the consideration of the consumer and his expectation for safe food.
The guidelines for tracking, recall and withdrawal do not define food quality requirements, but describe what procedures and processes the industry has established to mitigate any unwanted effects should an incident or crisis occur in a product.
Best practices
The guidelines describe best practices in this area.
By following STAND’s framework, the guidelines will be achievable for all parties involved.
Some important prerequisites for best practice.
By ensuring that a total industry complies with STAND’s framework, consumers’ demands and expectations for safe food are fully met.
Objective of the guidelines
The guidelines are aimed at “Contribute to meet consumers’ expectations for safe products”.
Target Audience:
Products / areas to which the guidelines apply:
Medicines are exempt from the guidelines. Here we refer to separate regulations, not described here.
Certain types of food may be subject to additional regulatory requirements beyond what is described here. An example is the EU’s new tobacco directive (EU 2014/40) which make the requirements for traceability of tobacco products more stringent, but is not described here.
The legislation requires that each company must have systems to document which products are purchased from each supplier and which customer has purchased the company’s finished products.
This also includes raw materials and other input that are covered by the legislation.
There is no requirement in the legislation for which type of systems to be used for this.
Businesses can practice more comprehensive tracking systems than the minimum regulatory requirements require, but this is either based on self-imposed requirements or agreements with, and orders from the contracting parties.
Tracking means being able to follow the physical flow of goods. This is often referred to as chain traceability, and assumes that all parties meet the requirements and follow the guidelines for tracking.
Tracking takes into account the legal requirements for all parties to be able to trace their products one step forward and one step back in the value chain.
Tracking one step forward:
This means to the address the products are delivered to.
An invoice system containing information about item number / item name, customer number / customer name and invoice date is sufficient to be able to trace one step forward in the value chain.
If the company is using batch/lot numbers for their products, this should be included in the invoice, despatch advice and the like, or linked directly to the company’s own systems.
Tracking one step backward:
This means the address from which the products are delivered.
The company must keep a log of received products describing which products were purchased from whom and in which quantitiy, and date.
If the addresses for where products are delivered from or delivered to are not in accordance with the legal ownership of the products and the invoice process, this should be agreed separately between the parties.
The main purpose of the tracking information is to lay the groundwork for effective blocking, withdrawal or recall of products.
Central tracking information is:
It is a requirement that the products are labeled to enable tracking.
The marking must be affixed to the product packaging and legible.
The following applies to finished goods traded between supplier and distributor / retailer:
Information to be marked:
Load carrier (for example pallet) shall be marked with SSCC.
The sender must in his system have an overview of which recipient the product was sent to, and also the recipient must have an overview of which sender the product was received from. Both sender and recipient must be identified with GLN.
Sender shall in his system register:
Recipient shall in his system register:
The following applies to raw materials and other inputs:
More about tracking information and how the product can be tracked in the value chain is described here Recommended traceability methods in the value chain.
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines STAND has on how pallets are to be built and labelled for optimal transport and storage through the value chain.
The areas described are:
This is an animation that show what pallets are valid for distribution.
Requirements specifications can be downloaded here:
Requirements for approved EUR-pallets
Specification for reusable 1/1 plastic pallet
Specification for reusable 1/2 plastic pallet
Requirements specification for reusable 1/3 plastic pallet (from NLP)
Specification for reusable 1/4 plastic pallet
Requirements Specification reusable 1/2 wooden pallet
Requirements specification for 1/3 and 1/2 disposable cardboard pallet
It is a prerequisite for maintaining strength, that Stock Keeping Units (SKU) are placed within the edges of the pallet with a small margin.
Devices placed on or outside the edge can cause damage with subsequent reduced carrying capacity / risk of injury.
The pallet area should be utilized as best as possible with products. By following the Modular system optimal use of the pallet is ensured and reduces the risk of the load shifting during transport.
Overhang is not accepted.
The Distribution Unit (DU) is the unit the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) is stacked on / packed in for transport to distributor.
Design of a Standard pallet (Standard pallet and Standard pallet – Low)
A Standard pallet must contain the same product (same GTIN) with a fixed number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU), in a fixed pallet pattern, with equal number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU)on each layer, and where labelling of unique product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) is possible.
The pallet structure shall contain as little excess volume of “air” as possible.
Standard pallet
Maximum pallet height must be 1200 mm incl. pallet. All pallets with total height above standard 1200mm with maximum height of 1250 mm to be agreed bilaterally between supplier and their customers.
Tolerance limit for existing products is 1249 mm.
Standard pallet – Low
Maximum pallet height shall be 600 mm incl. pallet.
Standard pallet – Low is used for low-frequency products and for products with short shelf life.
Principles for the construction of a palletpattern, central in calculation of top load weight, ref Top load labelling system.
When creating a pallet pattern, the following applies:
Types of pallet pattern
When constructing Distribution Units (DU), the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be placed in accordance with a given pallet pattern. These are referred to as bond stacking and column stacking. Pallets can also be built as a combination of bond stacking and column stacking.
Bond Stacking
Bond Stacking means that the units on every other layer are different, thus locking each other to a greater or lesser extent, but it reduces the compressive strength by approx. 40%.
Example of good pallet utilization and stacking with bond stacking, for good stability.
Column Stacking
Column stacking means stacking packages on top of each other without overlapping with other packages. This form of stacking gives maximum strength in terms of pressure load due to that the corners have better roll stiffness than the sides, but the stack gives poor stability without additional use of shrink wrap, strap, ribbon or similar.
Example of column stacking in the lower pallet layers, and bond stacking on the top layer. Combining the different stacking methods achieves good stack strength on the lower layers while the pallet is locked on top.
This is often a good alternative to intermediate pallet sheets.
Use of plastic to secure the pallet through the value chain
Use of intermediate pallet sheets
Intermediate pallet sheets must be minimized and used only if this is necessary to ensure quality and transportability of the pallet.
Intermediate pallet sheets are preferred if the alternative to this is intermediate cartons, “Ears” on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) or use of corner trims.
Where intermediate pallet sheets are used, the following requirements apply:
See also Automated storage at distributor – greater understanding of the depalletization process
Example of intermediate pallet sheet that does not meet quality requirements. The intermediate pallet sheet is a thin paper and is not suitable for automatic warehouse systems
Example of what happens when using “thin paper” intermediate pallet sheets.
The sheet is hanging down in the robot. It blocks for sensors that check that the layer is separated from the rest of the pallet. The robot will stop, and manual error correction must be carried out before the machine can be restarted.
Example of pallet with intermediate pallet sheets, too big – hanging on outside the pallet.
Is not suitable.
Intermediate pallet sheets with holes. Is not suitable.
Endringslogg
The purpose of a standard for labelling of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) and Distribution Unit (DU) with subsequent electronic data interchange (EDI) is to:
The basis for this is the labelling of each Distribution Unit (DU) with a unique SSCC.
This code is the main key in the electronic Despatch Advice and is linked to information about which GTIN which the Distribution Unit (DU) consists of, the number of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) batch / lot number and shelf life information if applicable.
SSCC is the most important key for traceability of Distributions Units (DU), see Recommended way to track and trace a product in the value chain.
For that reason SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
Recommended way to track and trace a product in the value chain
Efficiency and traceability are achieved primarily through:
To ensure rational product and information flow in the distribution chain, STAND recommends a uniform labelling of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and Distribution Units (DU).
This simplifies the labelling of the manufacturer / supplier, shipment by shipper / freight forwarders and merchandise at distributor / store.
This labelling concept also applies to types of transport units other than pallets.
For fish and fish products, the following applies:
STAND has decided to refer to Norwegian Standard NS17099:2020 “Information technology — Fishery and aquaculture products — Requirements for labelling of distribution units and pallets in the trade of fishery and aquaculture products” for products that fall under this category. This standard replaces todays NS9405: 2014 “Fish and fish products. Requirements for labelling of distribution units and pallets in the trade of fish and fish products», and is valid as from 30. September 2020.
It can be ordered from Standard Norway.
Product information on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), with example of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label
Only product information should be labelled on a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU).
What information to be labelled depends on the type of product.
Intermediate Cartons shall be labelled as Stock Keeping Units (SKU)
Possible product information which SHALL or CAN be labelled on a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU)
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Includes GTIN-8 (8 digits), GTIN-12 (12 digits), GTIN-13 (13 digits) and GTIN-14 (14 digits).
All Stock Keeping Units (SKU) must have their own GTIN.
– For variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU), GTIN-14 with a leading digit 9 should be used.
– For other products, GTIN-13 is recommended.
Name of brand owner
– shall be shown in plain text either on the label or on the packaging.
Product name
– Must be written in plain text on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) product label.
– Must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, – and product description.
– The product description labelled on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be identical to the text in the Despatch Advice and Invoice.
-Product description should also contain a package description: for example, Coffee 12 x 500gr.
Batch / lot number
– A number generated by the manufacturer, used to achieve full traceability of product lot/batches in the value chain
– GS1-128 AI 10 must be used.
Shelf life information (“Best before” date, alternatively “Expiry date”)
– Must be labelled on all Stock Keeping Units which has shelf life printed on the Consumer Unit (CU)
GS1-128 AI 15 shall be used for «Best before date”
GS1-128 AI 17 shall be used for «Expiry date»
Net weight
– GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU).
– Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Supplier’s item number
– can be labelled in plain text.
Table showing what SHALL or CAN be labelled:
Overview of product information that shall or may be labelled on Stock Keeping Unit (SKU): | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
GTIN for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
Name of brand owner | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Shelf life | Must be labelled if shelf life is marekd on the Consumer Unit (CU) |
Must be labelled if shelf life is marekd on the Consumer Unit (CU) |
15, alternatively 17 |
n2 + n6
|
Net weight | Must be labelled for products with variable measures |
Must be labelled for products with variable measures |
310x | n4 + n6
|
Supplier’s item no. | Can be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Example of GS1 Product label for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), for a product with “Best before” date and a fixed weight:
Example of GS1 Product label for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), for a product with “Expiry date” and variable measures:
The standard differs on different types of pallets depending on the content.
Only Standard pallet and Promotional Unit can provide a clear labelling of product information that applies to the entire pallet.
Standard pallet
A Distribution Unit (DU) containing the same product (same GTIN) with fixed count of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) and where labelling of unique product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) is possible.
It is recommended that a Standard pallet only contain Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with the same batch / lot number and shelf life date.
There are two different types of Standard pallet:
Standard pallet – Low is used for low-frequency products and for products with short shelf life.
A product can only be used on one type of Standard pallet, either 120 cm height or 60 cm height.
Standard pallet with height 120 cm
Standard pallet with height 60 cm (Standard pallet – Low)
Standard pallet shall be labelled with product and transport information.
Since product information and transportation information are usually known at different times, the practical solution is to label the device with two different labels:
Product information on the GS1 product label for Standard pallet
SSCC (License Plate)
Must be labelled with GS1-128 AI 00 on the GS1 Product label on each Standard pallet in human readable text and in the bar code. The SSCC provides a unique identification of each Distribution Unit (DU). Because of traceability a SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
The bar code containing the SSCC should be the lowest bar code on the label. It is recommended to have a bar code containing only the SSCC and no other AI’s.
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Standard pallet must be labelled with GTIN. This can be done in the following ways:
Product name
The product’s name must be written in human readable text on the Distribution Unit’s (DU) product label. Product name must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, and product description. The product description labelled on the Distributions Unit (DU) must correspond to the text in the Despatch Advice and the invoice.
Batch / lot number.
GS1-128 AI 10 is generated by the manufacturer and used to track the product back to specific production series.
If all Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the pallet have the same batch / lot number, this is indicated on the label in human readable text and bar code. If the pallet contains Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with different batch / lot numbers, batch / lot number is omitted on the label. However, all unique batch / lot numbers must be stated in the electronic Despatch Advice.
Shelf life information
GS1-128 AI 15 should be labelled on all Distribution Units (DU) that contain Consumer Unit (CU) with “Best before date” printed on them.
Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking.
Net weight (in grams)
GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure products. Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Gross weight (in whole kg)
Shall be labelled in human readable text on each Distribution Unit (DU). Gross weight means weight of products, packaging and pallet (load carrier).
Max. top load (in whole kg)
Must be labelled in human readable text.
Distribution Units (DU) that can not be stacked (in transport or storing) are marked with: Cannot be stacked (Kan ikke stables).
Temperature requirements
shall be labelled in human readable text if the product has a temperature requirement.
Product labelling on Standard pallet
Overview of product information that shall or may be labelled on Standard pallet: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
SSCC (License Plate)1) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
GTIN for the Distribution Unit (DU)2) | Can be labelled | Can be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
GTIN for the contained Stock Keeping Units (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 02 | n2 + n14 |
Count of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the DU | Must be marked except when DU is defined as an SKU | Must be marked except when DU is defined as an SKU | 37 | n2 + n..8 |
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number3) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Best before date4) | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | 15 | n2 + n6 |
Net weight | Must be labelled for products of variable measure | Must be labelled for products of variable measure | 3103 | n4 + n6 |
Gross weight | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Max. top load | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled if the product has temperature requirements | Not labelled | ||
1) SSCC shall be indicated on the product label but permitted on both labels provided that the same number is used. 2) Can be used in a case for a transitional period. 3) If Batch / Lot No. is omitted on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), or it is different Batch / Lot No. on the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) this should not be labelled on the Distribution Unit (DU). 4) Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking. |
Example on the GS1 product label for Standard pallet
Promotional Unit
A Unit defined as a Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) containing a fixed number of Consumer Unit (CU), intended for display in stores.
Promotional Unit can be 1/1 pallet, 1/2 pallet or 1/3 pallet.
Each Promotional Unit has its own load carrier.
Promotional Unit consisting of 1/2 pallet or 1/3 pallet are placed on a slave pallet. This constitutes a transport unit.
If slave pallet is omitted, this must be agreed bilaterally. For example, for 1/2 pallets with good stability, they can be tied together and exclude the slave pallet. This allows for better use of the pallet by increasing the Promotional Unit, thus allowing more items on the pallet.
Promotional Units are labelled with two levels of SSCC:
Labelling of Promotional Units provides increased traceability in the value chain
Product information on the GS1 product label for Promotional Unit
SSCC (License Plate)
Must be labelled with GS1-128 AI 00 on the GS1 Product label on each Promotional Unit in human readable text and in the bar code. The SSCC provides a unique identification of each Distribution Unit (DU). Because of traceability a SSCC shall not be reused until after a minimum of 6 years.
The bar code containing the SSCC should be the lowest bar code on the label. It is recommended to have a bar code containing only the SSCC and no other AI’s.
GTIN – Global Trade Item Number
Promotional Unit must be labelled with GTIN. This can be done in the following ways:
Product name
The product’s name must be written in human readable text on the Distribution Unit’s (DU) product label. Product name must be based on the text in the Norwegian grocery data pool – EPD database, and consists of product name, attributes, and product description. The product description labelled on the Distributions Unit (DU) must correspond to the text in the Despatch Advice and the invoice.
Batch / lot number
GS1-128 AI 10 is generated by the manufacturer and used to track the product back to specific production series.
If all Stock Keeping Units (SKU) on the Distribution Unit (DU) have the same batch / lot number, this is indicated on the label in plain text and bar code. If the Distribution Unit (DU) contains Stock Keeping Units (SKU) with different batch / lot numbers, batch / lot number is omitted on the label. However, all unique batch / lot numbers must be stated in the electronic Despatch Advice.
Shelf life information
GS1-128 AI 15 should be labelled on all Distribution Units (DU) that contain Consumer Unit (CU) with “Best before date” printed on them.
Consumer Unit (CU). Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking.
Net weight (in grams)
GS1-128 AI 3103 shall be used for variable measure Stock Keeping Units (SKU). Net weight means weight of product excluding packaging (the same weight that is being invoiced).
Gross weight (in whole kg)
shall be labelled in human readable text on each Distribution Unit (DU). Gross weight means weight of products, packaging and pallet (load carrier).
Max. top load (in whole kg)
must be labelled in human readable text.
Distribution Units (DU) that can not be stacked (in transport or storing) are marked with: Cannot be stacked.
Temperature requirements
shall be labelled in human readable text if the product has a temperature requirement.
Product labelling on Promotional Unit
Overview of labelling of product information that may or may not be labelled on Promotional Unit: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
SSCC (License Plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
GTIN for Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 01 | n2 + n14 |
Product name | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Batch / lot number1) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 10 | n2 + an..20 |
Best before date2) | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | Must be labelled if Consumer Unit (CU) has printed best before date | 15 | n2 + n6 |
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled if the product has temperature requirements | Not labelled | ||
Supplier’s item number | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
1) If Batch / Lot No. is omitted on the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU), or it is different Batch / Lot No. on the Stock Keeping Units (SKU) this should not be labelled on the Distribution Unit (DU). 2) Alternatively, the expiration date (GS1-128 AI 17) may be used for shelf life marking. |
Example of Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) label with SSCC for Promotional Unit
Units where product information can not be entered on their own label
Mixed pallet
Two variants of Mixed pallets are described; with and without intermediate pallet.
On Mixed pallet it is not possible to enter product information on its own label.
Mixed pallet without intermediate pallet:
Pallet consisting of several different products.
Mixed pallet with intermediate pallet:
Pallet consisting of several different products, where each product is stacked in one or more layers, and where each different product is separated by an intermediate pallet.
The choice of type of mixed pallet depends, among other things, on handling costs, transport / environmental costs and storage technology and must be agreed bilaterally between the parties.
Packaging and stability of the Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) must be considered when choosing type of a Mixed pallet.
If intermediate pallet(s) are used, it shall always be ordered the amount of Stock Keeping Units (SKU) to complete a layer.
Mixed pallet (both with and without intermediate pallet) is labelled with Standard shipping label for Norwegian grocery sector.
Customer packed pallet
When a supplier assembles products for delivery to the final recipient, the products are packaged and labelled with SSCC at two packaging levels.
Customer packed units are labelled for delivery to the end-user and the Distribution Unit (DU) is labelled for delivery to the transit warehouse.
On Customer packed units it is not possible to enter product information on the Distribution Unit (DU) label.
A customer-packed pallet can be Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers, Customer packed unit – single route, multiple customers, or Customer packed unit – single customer.
This Customer packed units does not need to have its own load carrier and is being loaded on a standardized transport unit (for example, an EUR pallet).
Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers and Customer packed unit – single route, multiple customer is stacked in columns per. end receiver.
Customer packed unit – multiple route, multiple customers is split after products receipt in the transit warehouse, and the individual Customer packed unit is forwarded to the final recipient. A prerequisite is that all Customer packed units located on one Distribution Unit (DU) are destined for the same transit warehouse.
Content of the Standard shipping label for the Norwegian grocery sector.
Overview of labelling of Standard shipping label: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
Sender’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Recipient’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Name, address, etc. for the Crossdocking terminal | Must be labelled when the delivery is via the Crossdocking terminal | Not labelled | ||
Buyer’s reference | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Gross weight | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Max. Top load1) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
SSCC (License Plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
1) Max Top load is omitted for Mixed pallet. |
Example of Standard shipping label for the grocery industry
Transport label for Standard pallet
Standard pallet is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry
A GS1 product label on a Standard pallet requires labeling of SSCC, gross weight, top load weight and temperature requirements.
This information can therefore be omitted from Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
If both product label and transport label are used, SSCC can be labelled on both labels provided that the identical number is used.
Transport label for Promotional Unit
The Distribution Unit (DU) containing one or more Promotional Units is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
The Distribution Unit (DU) is identified and labelled with its own SSCC
If the Promotional Unit a 1/1 pallet, the same labelling of transport label as for Standard pallet is used.
Transport label for Mixed pallet
Mixed pallet (both with and without interlayer pallet) is labelled with Standard shipping label for the Norwegian grocery industry.
If the Mixed pallet is not stackable, information on Top load is omitted.
Transport label for Customer packed pallets
The Customer packed pallet is labelled with Standard shipping label for the grocery industry.
Note in particular:
Recipient’s name, address, etc.
As recipient transit warehouse is given and transit address is given as delivery address. The pallet must be labelled with the transit warehouse’s name, street address, postal code and postal address in human readable text.
Name, address, etc. for the distribution warehouse.
The via-field the distribution warehouse is given. The pallet must be labelled with the distributions warehouse’s name, street address, postal code and postal address in human readable text.
Transport label for Customer packed units
Transport Information.
On this label, a separate field has been created for transport information. This is information that the buyer sends to the supplier in his order and which the supplier must put on the Customer packed unit’s transport label.
Format and content of transport information is agreed between the parties.
Content in transport label for customer packed unit
Transport label for customer packed unit: | ||||
Information | Human readable text | GS1-128 (bar code) | AI | Format |
Sender’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
End recipients’s name, street address, postal code, city | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Name, address, etc. for the transit warehouse1) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Transport information2) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Buyer’s reference3) | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
Gross weight4) | Must be labelled | Can be labelled | 3300 | n4 + n6 |
Temperature requirements | Must be labelled | Not labelled | ||
SSCC Code (licence plate) | Must be labelled | Must be labelled | 00 | n2 + n18 |
1) Transit Warehouse where the pallet is split/cross-docked, is stated in the VIA-field | ||||
2) Transport information is agreed between the parties | ||||
3) Example The Customers Ordering Number | ||||
4) Gross weight is the sum of weight of the products, packaging materials and pallet (load carrier) |
Example of shipping label for Customer packed unit
Placement of labels on pallet
Two types of labels shall be used; label for product information and label for transport information.
Identical information
Same information (GS1-128 AI) shall only appear once on the product and transport label.
This means in practice that the same information can not be repeated on the same label or that the same information may appear on multiple labels on the device (pallet).
The exception is SSCC which is allowed on both labels if it is an identical number used.
Size and design of the labels
The following recommendation applies:
Recommended formats are:
Quality of labels
Bar code label with GS1-128 bar codes shall be done according to GS1 General Specifications Chapter 5.4.
Note in particular:
This sub process describes the requirements, recommendations and guidelines that STAND has for raw materials, input factors, packaging and finished products traded in the retail trade.
The areas described are:
In its framework, STAND has defined guidelines, recommendations and best practices for how products should be marketed in the distribution chain, and how information on this should be exchanged between the parties.
Central to this is the consideration of the consumer and his expectation for safe food.
The guidelines for tracking, recall and withdrawal do not define food quality requirements, but describe what procedures and processes the industry has established to mitigate any unwanted effects should an incident or crisis occur in a product.
Best practices
The guidelines describe best practices in this area.
By following STAND’s framework, the guidelines will be achievable for all parties involved.
Some important prerequisites for best practice.
By ensuring that a total industry complies with STAND’s framework, consumers’ demands and expectations for safe food are fully met.
Objective of the guidelines
The guidelines are aimed at “Contribute to meet consumers’ expectations for safe products”.
Target Audience:
Products / areas to which the guidelines apply:
Medicines are exempt from the guidelines. Here we refer to separate regulations, not described here.
Certain types of food may be subject to additional regulatory requirements beyond what is described here. An example is the EU’s new tobacco directive (EU 2014/40) which make the requirements for traceability of tobacco products more stringent, but is not described here.
The legislation requires that each company must have systems to document which products are purchased from each supplier and which customer has purchased the company’s finished products.
This also includes raw materials and other input that are covered by the legislation.
There is no requirement in the legislation for which type of systems to be used for this.
Businesses can practice more comprehensive tracking systems than the minimum regulatory requirements require, but this is either based on self-imposed requirements or agreements with, and orders from the contracting parties.
Tracking means being able to follow the physical flow of goods. This is often referred to as chain traceability, and assumes that all parties meet the requirements and follow the guidelines for tracking.
Tracking takes into account the legal requirements for all parties to be able to trace their products one step forward and one step back in the value chain.
Tracking one step forward:
This means to the address the products are delivered to.
An invoice system containing information about item number / item name, customer number / customer name and invoice date is sufficient to be able to trace one step forward in the value chain.
If the company is using batch/lot numbers for their products, this should be included in the invoice, despatch advice and the like, or linked directly to the company’s own systems.
Tracking one step backward:
This means the address from which the products are delivered.
The company must keep a log of received products describing which products were purchased from whom and in which quantitiy, and date.
If the addresses for where products are delivered from or delivered to are not in accordance with the legal ownership of the products and the invoice process, this should be agreed separately between the parties.
The main purpose of the tracking information is to lay the groundwork for effective blocking, withdrawal or recall of products.
Central tracking information is:
It is a requirement that the products are labeled to enable tracking.
The marking must be affixed to the product packaging and legible.
The following applies to finished goods traded between supplier and distributor / retailer:
Information to be marked:
Load carrier (for example pallet) shall be marked with SSCC.
The sender must in his system have an overview of which recipient the product was sent to, and also the recipient must have an overview of which sender the product was received from. Both sender and recipient must be identified with GLN.
Sender shall in his system register:
Recipient shall in his system register:
The following applies to raw materials and other inputs:
More about tracking information and how the product can be tracked in the value chain is described here Recommended traceability methods in the value chain.
The content of this web site is copyright protected. You may download, display, print and reproduce this material in unaltered form only for your personal, non-commercial use, or use within your organisation.
Requests and inquiries concerning reproduction and rights should be addressed to support@stand.no
You are not permitted to re-transmit, distribute or commercialise the information or material without seeking prior written approval from STAND.
You may link to the www.stand.no, at your full expense and responsibility.